US20240029334A1 - Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen - Google Patents

Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20240029334A1
US20240029334A1 US18/375,309 US202318375309A US2024029334A1 US 20240029334 A1 US20240029334 A1 US 20240029334A1 US 202318375309 A US202318375309 A US 202318375309A US 2024029334 A1 US2024029334 A1 US 2024029334A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
user
avatar
computer system
input
touch
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US18/375,309
Inventor
Raymond S. Sepulveda
Kevin N. Armstrong
Amaury Balliet
Adam M. Cotugno
Lisa K. Forssell
Thomas Goossens
Aurelio GUZMAN
Guilherme Jacinto
Steve S. Ko
Jason D. Rickwald
Nicolas V. Scapel
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Apple Inc
Original Assignee
Apple Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Apple Inc filed Critical Apple Inc
Priority to US18/375,309 priority Critical patent/US20240029334A1/en
Publication of US20240029334A1 publication Critical patent/US20240029334A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T13/00Animation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T13/00Animation
    • G06T13/203D [Three Dimensional] animation
    • G06T13/403D [Three Dimensional] animation of characters, e.g. humans, animals or virtual beings
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F21/00Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F21/30Authentication, i.e. establishing the identity or authorisation of security principals
    • G06F21/31User authentication
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F21/00Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F21/30Authentication, i.e. establishing the identity or authorisation of security principals
    • G06F21/31User authentication
    • G06F21/32User authentication using biometric data, e.g. fingerprints, iris scans or voiceprints
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F21/00Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F21/30Authentication, i.e. establishing the identity or authorisation of security principals
    • G06F21/45Structures or tools for the administration of authentication
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/04815Interaction with a metaphor-based environment or interaction object displayed as three-dimensional, e.g. changing the user viewpoint with respect to the environment or object
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/0482Interaction with lists of selectable items, e.g. menus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04842Selection of displayed objects or displayed text elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T2200/00Indexing scheme for image data processing or generation, in general
    • G06T2200/24Indexing scheme for image data processing or generation, in general involving graphical user interfaces [GUIs]

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more specifically to techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen user interface.
  • Some computer systems display lock screens, which indicate to a user that the computer system is powered on and locked.
  • a computer system may display a lock screen when the system is turned on, when the system is restarted, or when a user is logged out.
  • Some techniques for managing lock screens using electronic devices are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.
  • the present technique provides electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • Methods and interfaces of the present technique optionally complement or replace other methods for managing avatars.
  • Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • For battery-operated computing devices such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
  • Methods and interfaces of the present technique also provide the user with visual feedback about the inputs being received at the device and the state of the device.
  • a method is described. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in
  • a transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of
  • a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices.
  • the computer system comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the
  • a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices.
  • the computer system comprises: means, while the computer system is in a locked state, for: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and means, responsive to receiving the first input, for: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the
  • a computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the
  • Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
  • devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices.
  • Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace other methods for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 1 B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 4 A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 4 B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 5 A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 5 B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 X illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing an avatar on a lock screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the animations of the avatar provide the user with visual feedback about what inputs are being received at the device and about the state of the device.
  • Such techniques can reduce the cognitive burden on a user who use lock screens, thereby enhancing productivity. Further, such techniques can reduce processor and battery power otherwise wasted on redundant user inputs.
  • FIGS. 1 A- 1 B, 2 , 3 , 4 A- 4 B, and 5 A- 5 B provide a description of exemplary devices for performing the techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 X illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing an avatar on a lock screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the processes described below enhance the operability of the devices and make the user-device interfaces more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) through various techniques, including by providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls, performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, and/or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and improve battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • system or computer readable medium contains instructions for performing the contingent operations based on the satisfaction of the corresponding one or more conditions and thus is capable of determining whether the contingency has or has not been satisfied without explicitly repeating steps of a method until all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met.
  • a system or computer readable storage medium can repeat the steps of a method as many times as are needed to ensure that all of the contingent steps have been performed.
  • first could be termed a second touch
  • second touch could be termed a first touch
  • the first touch and the second touch are two separate references to the same touch.
  • the first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch.
  • if is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context.
  • phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
  • the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions.
  • portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • Other portable electronic devices such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used.
  • the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touchpad).
  • the electronic device is a computer system that is in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with a display generation component.
  • the display generation component is configured to provide visual output, such as display via a CRT display, display via an LED display, or display via image projection.
  • the display generation component is integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the display generation component is separate from the computer system.
  • displaying includes causing to display the content (e.g., video data rendered or decoded by display controller 156 ) by transmitting, via a wired or wireless connection, data (e.g., image data or video data) to an integrated or external display generation component to visually produce the content.
  • content e.g., video data rendered or decoded by display controller 156
  • data e.g., image data or video data
  • an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.
  • the device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
  • applications such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
  • the various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface.
  • One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application.
  • a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.
  • FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.”
  • Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 122 , one or more processing units (CPUs) 120 , peripherals interface 118 , RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem 106 , other input control devices 116 , and external port 124 .
  • memory 102 which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums
  • memory controller 122 includes memory controller 122 , one or more processing units (CPUs) 120 , peripherals interface 118 , RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , input/output (I/O)
  • Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164 .
  • Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 ).
  • Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103 .
  • the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256).
  • Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact.
  • a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements).
  • the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure).
  • intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).
  • the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch.
  • a component e.g., a touch-sensitive surface
  • another component e.g., housing
  • the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device.
  • a touch-sensitive surface e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad
  • the user is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button.
  • a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements.
  • movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users.
  • a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”)
  • the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
  • device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
  • the various components shown in FIG. 1 A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.
  • Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices.
  • Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100 .
  • Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102 .
  • the one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)) and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data.
  • peripherals interface 118 , CPU 120 , and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.
  • RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals.
  • RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals.
  • RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
  • an antenna system an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
  • the RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio.
  • NFC near field communication
  • the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.
  • Audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100 .
  • Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111 .
  • Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.
  • Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves.
  • Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118 .
  • audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212 , FIG.
  • the headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
  • removable audio input/output peripherals such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
  • I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100 , such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116 , to peripherals interface 118 .
  • I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156 , optical sensor controller 158 , depth camera controller 169 , intensity sensor controller 159 , haptic feedback controller 161 , and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices.
  • the one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 116 .
  • the other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth.
  • input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse.
  • the one or more buttons optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113 .
  • the one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206 , FIG. 2 ).
  • the electronic device is a computer system that is in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with one or more input devices.
  • the one or more input devices include a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a trackpad, as part of a touch-sensitive display).
  • the one or more input devices include one or more camera sensors (e.g., one or more optical sensors 164 and/or one or more depth camera sensors 175 ), such as for tracking a user's gestures (e.g., hand gestures and/or air gestures) as input.
  • the one or more input devices are integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices are separate from the computer system.
  • an air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independently of an input element that is a part of the device) and is based on detected motion of a portion of the user's body through the air including motion of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., an angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or a distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), relative to another portion of the user's body (e.g., movement of a hand of the user relative to a shoulder of the user, movement of one hand of the user relative to another hand of the user, and/or movement of a finger of the user relative to another finger or portion of a hand of the user), and/or absolute motion of a portion of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes movement of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and/or speed, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a portion of the user
  • a quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touch screen 112 or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed Dec. 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • a longer press of the push button e.g., 206
  • the functionality of one or more of the buttons are, optionally, user-customizable.
  • Touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
  • Touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user.
  • Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 112 .
  • Touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user.
  • the visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to user-interface objects.
  • Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact.
  • Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 112 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 112 .
  • user-interface objects e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images
  • a point of contact between touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.
  • Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments.
  • Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112 .
  • touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112 .
  • projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is, optionally, analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Pat. No. 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), U.S. Pat. No. 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or U.S. Pat. No. 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100 , whereas touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
  • a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is described in the following applications: (1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jul. 30, 2004; (4) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 31, 2005; (5) U.S. patent application Ser. No.
  • Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi.
  • the user optionally makes contact with touch screen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth.
  • the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen.
  • the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
  • device 100 in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating particular functions.
  • the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output.
  • the touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
  • Power system 162 for powering the various components.
  • Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
  • power sources e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)
  • AC alternating current
  • a recharging system e.g., a recharging system
  • a power failure detection circuit e.g., a power failure detection circuit
  • a power converter or inverter e.g., a power converter or inverter
  • a power status indicator e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164 .
  • FIG. 1 A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem 106 .
  • Optical sensor 164 optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors.
  • CCD charge-coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
  • Optical sensor 164 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image.
  • imaging module 143 also called a camera module
  • optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video.
  • an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch screen display 112 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition.
  • an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display.
  • the position of optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 164 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more depth camera sensors 175 .
  • FIG. 1 A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to depth camera controller 169 in I/O subsystem 106 .
  • Depth camera sensor 175 receives data from the environment to create a three dimensional model of an object (e.g., a face) within a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a depth camera sensor).
  • a viewpoint e.g., a depth camera sensor
  • depth camera sensor 175 in conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), depth camera sensor 175 is optionally used to determine a depth map of different portions of an image captured by the imaging module 143 .
  • a depth camera sensor is located on the front of device 100 so that the user's image with depth information is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display and to capture selfies with depth map data.
  • the depth camera sensor 175 is located on the back of device, or on the back and the front of the device 100 .
  • the position of depth camera sensor 175 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a depth camera sensor 175 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
  • a depth map (e.g., depth map image) contains information (e.g., values) that relates to the distance of objects in a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor).
  • a viewpoint e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor.
  • each depth pixel defines the position in the viewpoint's Z-axis where its corresponding two-dimensional pixel is located.
  • a depth map is composed of pixels wherein each pixel is defined by a value (e.g., 0-255).
  • the “0” value represents pixels that are located at the most distant place in a “three dimensional” scene and the “255” value represents pixels that are located closest to a viewpoint (e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor) in the “three dimensional” scene.
  • a depth map represents the distance between an object in a scene and the plane of the viewpoint.
  • the depth map includes information about the relative depth of various features of an object of interest in view of the depth camera (e.g., the relative depth of eyes, nose, mouth, ears of a user's face).
  • the depth map includes information that enables the device to determine contours of the object of interest in a z direction.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 .
  • FIG. 1 A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106 .
  • Contact intensity sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface).
  • Contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment.
  • contact intensity information e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information
  • At least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch screen display 112 , which is located on the front of device 100 .
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166 .
  • FIG. 1 A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118 .
  • proximity sensor 166 is, optionally, coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 .
  • Proximity sensor 166 optionally performs as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; Ser. No. 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and Ser.
  • the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167 .
  • FIG. 1 A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106 .
  • Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device).
  • Contact intensity sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100 .
  • At least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100 ).
  • at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch screen display 112 , which is located on the front of device 100 .
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168 .
  • FIG. 1 A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118 .
  • accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled to an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 .
  • Accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers.
  • Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168 , a magnetometer and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100 .
  • GPS or GLONASS or other global navigation system
  • the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126 , communication module (or set of instructions) 128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130 , graphics module (or set of instructions) 132 , text input module (or set of instructions) 134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135 , and applications (or sets of instructions) 136 .
  • memory 102 FIG. 1 A or 370 ( FIG. 3 ) stores device/global internal state 157 , as shown in FIGS. 1 A and 3 .
  • Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and input control devices 116 ; and location information concerning the device's location and/or attitude.
  • Operating system 126 e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
  • Operating system 126 includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
  • Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124 .
  • External port 124 e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • FIREWIRE FireWire
  • the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
  • Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156 ) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel).
  • Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).
  • Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.
  • contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon).
  • at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100 ). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware.
  • a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).
  • Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.
  • Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts).
  • a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern.
  • detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon).
  • detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.
  • Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed.
  • graphics includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
  • graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156 .
  • Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100 .
  • Text input module 134 which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137 , e-mail 140 , IM 141 , browser 147 , and any other application that needs text input).
  • applications e.g., contacts 137 , e-mail 140 , IM 141 , browser 147 , and any other application that needs text input.
  • GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
  • applications e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
  • Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
  • Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
  • contacts module 137 are, optionally, used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138 , video conference module 139 , e-mail 140 , or IM 141 ; and so forth.
  • an address book or contact list e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370 , including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name
  • telephone module 138 are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed.
  • the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.
  • video conference module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
  • e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions.
  • e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143 .
  • the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages.
  • SMS Short Message Service
  • MMS Multimedia Message Service
  • XMPP extensible Markup Language
  • SIMPLE Session Initiation Protocol
  • IMPS Internet Messaging Protocol
  • transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS).
  • EMS Enhanced Messaging Service
  • instant messaging refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
  • workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.
  • create workouts e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals
  • communicate with workout sensors sports devices
  • receive workout sensor data calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout
  • select and play music for a workout and display, store, and transmit workout data.
  • camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 102 .
  • image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
  • modify e.g., edit
  • present e.g., in a digital slide show or album
  • browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
  • calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
  • widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149 - 1 , stocks widget 149 - 2 , calculator widget 149 - 3 , alarm clock widget 149 - 4 , and dictionary widget 149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149 - 6 ).
  • a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file.
  • a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
  • the widget creator module 150 are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
  • search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
  • search criteria e.g., one or more user-specified search terms
  • video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external, connected display via external port 124 ).
  • device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
  • notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
  • map module 154 are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
  • maps e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data
  • online video module 155 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264.
  • instant messaging module 141 is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Jun. 20, 2007, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Dec. 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein).
  • modules e.g., sets of instructions
  • These modules need not be implemented as separate software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)), procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments.
  • video player module is, optionally, combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 152 , FIG. 1 A ).
  • memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above.
  • memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad.
  • a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.
  • the predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces.
  • the touchpad when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100 .
  • a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad.
  • the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
  • FIG. 1 B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
  • memory 102 FIG. 1 A
  • 370 FIG. 3
  • event sorter 170 e.g., in operating system 126
  • application 136 - 1 e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137 - 151 , 155 , 380 - 390 ).
  • Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136 - 1 and application view 191 of application 136 - 1 to which to deliver the event information.
  • Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174 .
  • application 136 - 1 includes application internal state 192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing.
  • device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.
  • application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136 - 1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
  • Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118 .
  • Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display 112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture).
  • Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166 , accelerometer(s) 168 , and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110 ).
  • Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.
  • event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
  • event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173 .
  • Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
  • the application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
  • Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture.
  • hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event).
  • the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
  • Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.
  • Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173 , event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 182 .
  • operating system 126 includes event sorter 170 .
  • application 136 - 1 includes event sorter 170 .
  • event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102 , such as contact/motion module 130 .
  • application 136 - 1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface.
  • Each application view 191 of the application 136 - 1 includes one or more event recognizers 180 .
  • a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180 .
  • one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit or a higher level object from which application 136 - 1 inherits methods and other properties.
  • a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176 , object updater 177 , GUI updater 178 , and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170 .
  • Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 , object updater 177 , or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192 .
  • one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190 .
  • one or more of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191 .
  • a respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179 ) from event sorter 170 and identifies an event from the event information.
  • Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184 .
  • event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183 , and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).
  • Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170 .
  • the event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
  • Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event.
  • event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186 .
  • Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 ( 187 - 1 ), event 2 ( 187 - 2 ), and others.
  • sub-events in an event include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching.
  • the definition for event 1 is a double tap on a displayed object.
  • the double tap for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase.
  • the definition for event 2 is a dragging on a displayed object.
  • the dragging for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display 112 , and liftoff of the touch (touch end).
  • the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190 .
  • event definitions 186 include a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object.
  • event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112 , event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
  • the definition for a respective event also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186 , the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers.
  • metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another.
  • metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized.
  • a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190 .
  • Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.
  • event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.
  • event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
  • data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136 - 1 .
  • data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137 , or stores a video file used in video player module.
  • object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136 - 1 .
  • object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object.
  • GUI updater 178 updates the GUI.
  • GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.
  • event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 .
  • data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136 - 1 or application view 191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
  • event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens.
  • mouse movement and mouse button presses optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200 .
  • UI user interface
  • a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure).
  • selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics.
  • the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100 .
  • inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic.
  • a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
  • Device 100 optionally also include one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204 .
  • menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally, executed on device 100 .
  • the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112 .
  • device 100 includes touch screen 112 , menu button 204 , push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208 , subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210 , headset jack 212 , and docking/charging external port 124 .
  • Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process.
  • device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113 .
  • Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100 .
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Device 300 need not be portable.
  • device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller).
  • Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310 , one or more network or other communications interfaces 360 , memory 370 , and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components.
  • Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components.
  • Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display 340 , which is typically a touch screen display.
  • I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355 , tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A ), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A ).
  • I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355 , tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A ), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to
  • Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310 . In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1 A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 .
  • memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380 , presentation module 382 , word processing module 384 , website creation module 386 , disk authoring module 388 , and/or spreadsheet module 390 , while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1 A ) optionally does not store these modules.
  • Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 3 is, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices.
  • Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above.
  • the above-identified modules or computer programs e.g., sets of instructions or including instructions
  • memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above.
  • memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • FIG. 4 A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300 .
  • user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
  • icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4 A are merely exemplary.
  • icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.”
  • Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons.
  • a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon.
  • a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
  • FIG. 4 B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355 , FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112 ).
  • Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 359 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300 .
  • one or more contact intensity sensors e.g., one or more of sensors 359
  • tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300 .
  • the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4 B .
  • the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 451 in FIG. 4 B
  • the touch-sensitive surface has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4 B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4 B ) on the display (e.g., 450 ).
  • the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG.
  • finger inputs e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures
  • one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input).
  • a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact).
  • a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
  • multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
  • FIG. 5 A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500 .
  • Device 500 includes body 502 .
  • device 500 can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., FIGS. 1 A- 4 B ).
  • device 500 has touch-sensitive display screen 504 , hereafter touch screen 504 .
  • touch screen 504 or the touch-sensitive surface
  • touch screen 504 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied.
  • the one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches.
  • the user interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 500 .
  • Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2013/169849, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed Nov. 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508 .
  • Input mechanisms 506 and 508 can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms.
  • device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 500 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.
  • FIG. 5 B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500 .
  • device 500 can include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1 A, 1 B , and 3 .
  • Device 500 has bus 512 that operatively couples I/O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518 .
  • I/O section 514 can be connected to display 504 , which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, intensity sensor 524 (e.g., contact intensity sensor).
  • I/O section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques.
  • Device 500 can include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508 .
  • Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example.
  • Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.
  • Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples.
  • Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor 532 , accelerometer 534 , directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536 , motion sensor 538 , and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514 .
  • sensors such as GPS sensor 532 , accelerometer 534 , directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536 , motion sensor 538 , and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514 .
  • Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 516 , for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including process 700 ( FIG. 7 ).
  • a computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device.
  • the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium.
  • the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium.
  • the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storages.
  • Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5 B , but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.
  • the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on the display screen of devices 100 , 300 , and/or 500 ( FIGS. 1 A, 3 , and 5 A- 5 B ).
  • an image e.g., icon
  • a button e.g., button
  • text e.g., hyperlink
  • the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting.
  • the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4 B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
  • a touch screen display e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG.
  • a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
  • an input e.g., a press input by the contact
  • a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element
  • focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface.
  • the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact).
  • a focus selector e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box
  • a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
  • the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact).
  • a predefined time period e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds
  • a characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like.
  • the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time).
  • the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.
  • the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold.
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation.
  • a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
  • an “installed application” refers to a software application that has been downloaded onto an electronic device (e.g., devices 100 , 300 , and/or 500 ) and is ready to be launched (e.g., become opened) on the device.
  • a downloaded application becomes an installed application by way of an installation program that extracts program portions from a downloaded package and integrates the extracted portions with the operating system of the computer system.
  • open application or “executing application” refer to a software application with retained state information (e.g., as part of device/global internal state 157 and/or application internal state 192 ).
  • An open or executing application is, optionally, any one of the following types of applications:
  • closing an application refers to software applications without retained state information (e.g., state information for closed applications is not stored in a memory of the device). Accordingly, closing an application includes stopping and/or removing application processes for the application and removing state information for the application from the memory of the device. Generally, opening a second application while in a first application does not close the first application. When the second application is displayed and the first application ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes a background application.
  • UP user interfaces
  • portable multifunction device 100 such as portable multifunction device 100 , device 300 , or device 500 .
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 X illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen, in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in FIG. 7 .
  • FIG. 6 A illustrates a computer system 600 that is a laptop computer with display 600 A, touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad) 600 B, keyboard 600 C, and fingerprint sensor 600 D.
  • Computer system 600 optionally includes the same features as described above with respect to electronic devices 100 , 300 , and/or 500 .
  • computer system 600 has been turned on and lock screen 602 is being displayed.
  • lock screen 602 includes an indication 604 that computer system 600 is still loading an operating system.
  • the computer system does not process some types of inputs while the operating system is loading, such as inputs received at a pointing device (e.g., at touch-sensitive surface 600 B and/or at a computer mouse).
  • avatars 610 - 616 are displayed with static poses, meaning avatars 610 - 616 are not animated (e.g., until the operating system finishes loading).
  • Avatars 610 - 614 represent user accounts configured on computer system 600 .
  • Guest avatar 616 represents a guest account that can be used to access some features of computer system 600 by a user that does not have an existing user account.
  • Avatars 610 - 614 are displayed based on previously having been selected by the respective users to represent the users.
  • the static poses of avatars 610 - 614 illustrated in FIG.
  • FIG. 6 A are poses that have been previously selected by the respective users as the pose to use to represent the users, such as in a contact card (e.g., 684 of FIG. 6 X ) of the user and/or in instant messaging conversations (e.g., 682 of FIG. 6 X ) in which the user is a participant, as will be described in further detail with respective to FIG. 6 X .
  • a contact card e.g., 684 of FIG. 6 X
  • instant messaging conversations e.g., 682 of FIG. 6 X
  • John has previously selected avatar 610 to represent his user account (e.g., selected when the user account was created). Additionally, John selected a particular pose of avatar 610 to represent his user account, as shown in the static pose of John's avatar 610 at FIG. 6 A .
  • John and Sam have previously selected avatars 612 and 614 to represent them, respectively.
  • Jane and Sam have also previously selected the particular poses of avatars 612 and 614 to represent them, as shown in the static poses of Jane's avatar 612 and Sam's avatar 614 in FIG. 6 A .
  • avatars 610 - 614 are animated.
  • Computer system 600 displays a smooth transition between avatars 610 - 614 of FIG. 6 A when they are static and avatars 610 - 614 when they are animated, such as by centering the static avatar in the respective circles (where the circle does not move during the smooth transition) and cross-fading between the static and animated versions of the respective avatars 610 - 614 .
  • Avatars 610 - 614 are animated with a three dimensional appearance, with the animations includes changes in facial expression, shape, location, size, and/or rotation (one, two, or three axes) of the avatar.
  • FIG. 6 B the operating system of computer system 600 has loaded and no further user input has been received at the system.
  • avatars 610 - 614 cycle through various animations to indicate to the user that the avatars can be selected to log into a respective user account.
  • computer system 600 displays shutdown option 620 A, restart option 620 B, and sleep option 620 .
  • Shutdown option 620 A when selected, causes computer system 600 to shut down.
  • Restart option 620 B when selected, causes computer system 600 to restart.
  • Sleep option 620 when selected, causes computer system 600 to enter a low power mode.
  • FIGS. 6 B- 6 K although avatars 610 - 614 are animated at the same time, computer system 600 manages the animations of avatars 610 - 614 such that they do not concurrently perform the same animation.
  • Guest avatar 616 is static (e.g., not animated, and/or maintains the same size and position) throughout FIGS. 6 A- 6 G and 6 I- 6 K .
  • computer system 600 detects a first pointer-movement input (e.g., swipe gesture 650 A at touch sensitive surface 600 B or a mouse movement).
  • computer system 600 changes the position of cursor 660 on display 600 A, as shown in FIGS. 6 B- 6 D .
  • cursor 660 begins to move across lock screen 602
  • avatars 610 - 614 animate to look in the direction of the cursor, such as by turning their head and/or moving their eyes. This provides the user with feedback that computer system 600 has received user input and indicates to the user where the cursor is located on display 600 A and/or lock screen 602 .
  • cursor 660 moves on display 600 A from the position in FIG.
  • avatars 610 - 614 continue to animate to look in the direction of cursor 660 in conjunction with the movement of cursor 660 .
  • the movement of cursor 660 is based on, e.g., the movement of swipe gesture 650 A or movement of a mouse (or other pointing device, e.g., 350 ) in communication with computer system 600 .
  • computer system 600 has stopped receiving inputs at touch sensitive surface 600 B for a first predetermined amount of time, such as for 5 seconds or 10 seconds.
  • avatars 610 - 614 cease to look in the direction of the cursor while continuing to animate while waiting for user input.
  • the animation while waiting for user input includes, for example, avatars 610 - 614 looking around, bobbing their heads, and/or smiling.
  • the waiting animation includes cycling through repetitive animations with unique animations randomly interspersed within the repetitive animations.
  • avatars 610 - 614 are animated at the same time, but computer system 600 selects the animations of avatars 610 - 614 so that they do not concurrently perform the same animation.
  • the same movements are performed by avatars 610 - 614 as part of the waiting animation, but at different times.
  • computer system 600 has continued to not receive user inputs (e.g., at touch-sensitive surface 600 B, at keyboard 600 C, and at fingerprint sensor 600 D) since the first pointer-movement input in FIGS. 6 B- 6 C (e.g., swipe gesture 650 A) for a second predetermined amount of time (longer than the first predetermined amount of time), such as for 1 minute or 2 minutes.
  • Cursor 660 has remained in the same position in FIGS. 6 D- 6 F .
  • avatars 610 - 614 animate to sleeping appearances, as shown in FIG. 6 F .
  • the sleeping appearances include closed eyes, though avatars 610 - 614 optionally continue to animate with different movements (e.g., moving their heads with eyes closed and/or shifting from side to side).
  • computer system 600 begins to detect a second pointer-movement input (e.g., swipe gesture 650 B on touch-sensitive surface 600 B or movement of a mouse).
  • a second pointer-movement input e.g., swipe gesture 650 B on touch-sensitive surface 600 B or movement of a mouse.
  • cursor 660 moves across lock screen 602 .
  • Avatars 610 - 614 look in the direction of cursor 660 and follow cursor 660 as it moves across lock screen 602 , as shown in FIG. 6 G .
  • swipe gesture 650 B causes cursor 660 to move to shutdown option 620 A, causing shutdown option 620 A to change color to reflect that focus has been placed on shutdown option 620 A.
  • the direction in which each of avatars 610 - 614 is looking at cursor 660 differs because of their different respective positions on lock screen 602 .
  • computer system 600 begins to detect a drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600 B, which moves cursor 660 to guest avatar 616 , as shown in FIG. 6 H .
  • a drag input e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement
  • guest avatar 616 optionally enlarges (e.g., as compared to FIG. 6 G ).
  • Avatars 610 - 614 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • computer system 600 continues to detect the drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600 B, which moves cursor 660 to Sam's avatar 614 , as shown in FIG. 6 I .
  • the drag input e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement
  • guest avatar 616 reduces in size.
  • Sam's avatar 614 becomes more attentive and/or more active, and optionally becomes larger, as compared to when the focus of cursor 660 was not on Sam's avatar 614 .
  • the animated expression of Sam's avatar 614 also changes to one of excitement.
  • Sam's avatar 614 stops looking at or following cursor 660 when the focus of cursor 660 is on Sam's avatar 614 .
  • Avatars 610 - 612 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • computer system 600 continues to detect a drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600 B, which moves cursor 660 from Sam's avatar 614 to Jane's avatar 612 , as shown in FIG. 6 J .
  • a drag input e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement
  • FIG. 6 J because the focus of cursor 660 is no longer on Sam's avatar 614 , Sam's avatar 614 becomes less attentive, and optionally gets smaller and less animated (e.g., less movement as compared to when the focus was on Sam's avatar 614 ). Because the focus of cursor 660 is on Jane's avatar 612 , Jane's avatar 612 becomes more attentive and/or more active, and optionally becomes larger.
  • the animated expression of Jane's avatar 612 also changes to one of excitement.
  • Jane's avatar 612 stops looking at or following cursor 660 when the focus of cursor 660 is on Jane's avatar 612 .
  • Avatars 610 and 614 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • computer system 600 continues to detect a drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600 B, which moves cursor 660 from Jane's avatar 612 to John's avatar 610 , as shown in FIG. 6 K .
  • a drag input e.g., swipe gesture 650 C or mouse movement
  • touch-sensitive surface 600 B which moves cursor 660 from Jane's avatar 612 to John's avatar 610 , as shown in FIG. 6 K .
  • Jane's avatar 612 becomes less attentive, and optionally gets smaller and less animated (e.g., less movement as compared to when the focus was on Jane's avatar 612 ).
  • John's avatar 610 becomes more attentive and/or more active (more animated, more movement) (e.g., as compared to avatars 612 - 614 at FIG. 6 K , as compared to John's avatar 610 when the focus was not on John's avatar 610 ), and optionally becomes larger.
  • the animated expression of John's avatar 610 also changes to one of excitement.
  • John's avatar 610 stops looking at or following cursor 660 when the focus of cursor 660 is on John's avatar 610 .
  • Avatars 612 and 614 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • computer system 600 detects a selection input (e.g., tap gesture 650 D on touch-sensitive surface 600 B or a mouse click) to select John's avatar 610 .
  • a selection input e.g., tap gesture 650 D on touch-sensitive surface 600 B or a mouse click
  • the expression of John's avatar changes to reflect the selection and computer system 600 ceases to display (e.g., by fading out and/or by sliding off of the display) avatars 612 - 616 and options 620 A- 620 C.
  • John's avatar moves (e.g., slides, translates) toward a central location (e.g., a predefined location) of lock screen 602 , as illustrated in FIGS. 6 L- 60 .
  • John's avatar is animated (e.g., using a physics model) during the movement to the central location to reflect the movement, such as by causing a tilting of the head of John's avatar 610 in one direction (e.g., to the right) as the avatar accelerates (e.g., at FIGS.
  • John's avatar 610 tilting of the head of John's avatar 610 in another direction (e.g., an opposite direction, to the left) as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location.
  • Other features of John's avatar 610 also optionally reflect the movement, such as the hair of John's avatar moving.
  • John's avatar 610 is displayed at the central location, along with password entry field 622 A and switch user option 620 D.
  • Password entry field 622 A is configured to receive textual input for receiving a password for John's user account.
  • Switch user option 620 D when selected, causes computer system 600 to re-display avatars 610 - 616 , as in FIG. 6 K , such that a new selection can be made and a password for a different account can be entered.
  • selection of switch user option 620 D causes John's avatar to move (e.g., slide, translate) toward the original position on the left side of lock screen 602 .
  • FIG. 6 P illustrates exemplary animations when different avatars are selected.
  • Left column 670 A illustrates a timeline of John's avatar 610 moving in response to being selected, as explained above with respect to FIGS. 6 K- 60 .
  • John's avatar 610 slides to the right to the central location, thereby causing the head of John's avatar 610 to tilt to the right as the avatar accelerates and, optionally, to the left as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location.
  • the head of John's avatar 610 shifts slightly (e.g., to the left) relative to the circle around the head of John's avatar 610 (e.g., the head lags the movement of the circle).
  • the amount by which the avatar shifts relative to the boundary around the avatar and/or the speed with which the avatar shifts relative to the boundary around the avatar is determined based on how far the avatar is from the respective location it will be displayed once it is selected (e.g., when the password entry field is displayed). For example, the avatar shifts further and/or faster relative to the boundary if the avatar is further away from the respective location and shifts less far and/or slower relative to the boundary if the avatar is closer to the respective location.
  • Jane's avatar 612 would also move (e.g., slide, translate) to the right to the central location, thereby causing the head of Jane's avatar 612 to tilt to the right as the avatar accelerates and, optionally, to the left as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. Because the starting location of Jane's avatar 612 is closer to the central location as compared to John's avatar 610 , Jane's avatar 612 moves more slowly as compared to John's avatar 610 and Jane's avatar 612 includes less head tilt because of the reduced acceleration and deceleration.
  • Sam's avatar 614 would move (e.g., slide, translate) to the left to the central location, thereby causing the head of Sam's avatar 614 to tilt to the left as the avatar accelerates and to the right as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. Because the starting location of Sam's avatar 614 is closer to the central location as compared to John's avatar 610 , Sam's avatar 614 moves more slowly as compared to John's avatar 610 and Sam's avatar 614 includes less head tilt as compared to John's avatar 610 because of the reduced acceleration and deceleration.
  • Sam's avatar 614 would move (e.g., slide, translate) to the left to the central location, thereby causing the head of Sam's avatar 614 to tilt to the left as the avatar accelerates and to the right as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. Because the starting location of Sam's avatar 614 is closer to the central location as compared to John's avatar 610 , Sam's avatar 614 moves more slowly
  • John's avatar 610 Based on being selected, John's avatar 610 , Jane's avatar 612 , and Sam's avatar 614 all move to the same central location (e.g., the predetermined location) to indicate which account has been selected, as shown in the bottom row of FIG. 6 P , and the password entry field is displayed.
  • the same central location e.g., the predetermined location
  • computer system 600 has received user input (e.g., voice input and/or gesture input at touch-sensitive surface 600 B) corresponding to a request for a password hint.
  • user input e.g., voice input and/or gesture input at touch-sensitive surface 600 B
  • computer system 600 displays password hint 622 B, which provides the user with one or more hints of the password for John's user account.
  • computer system 600 animates John's avatar 610 with an animation that is specific to requests for hints, such as an animation of John's avatar 610 with an inquisitive appearance.
  • computer system 600 receives a selection input (e.g., tap gesture 650 E at touch-sensitive surface 600 B or a mouse click), corresponding to selection of password entry field 622 A.
  • a selection input e.g., tap gesture 650 E at touch-sensitive surface 600 B or a mouse click
  • password hint 622 B ceases to be displayed and John's avatar 610 glances down at password entry field 622 A, then animates back to a neutral pose (e.g., not looking down at password entry field 622 A).
  • a neutral pose e.g., not looking down at password entry field 622 A.
  • keyboard user input 650 F e.g., via activation of characters of keyboard 600 C
  • John's avatar 610 glances down at password entry field 622 A (e.g., continues to look down at password entry field 622 A).
  • John's avatar 610 ceases to glance down at password entry field 622 A and returns to a neutral pose, as shown in FIG. 6 S .
  • computer system 600 has continued to not receive user inputs for a fourth predetermined amount of time (e.g., same as the first predetermined amount of time; 5 seconds, 7 seconds, or 10 seconds) and, in response, animates John's avatar 610 while waiting for user input.
  • the animation of John's avatar 610 while waiting for user inputs includes, for example, John's avatar 610 looking around, bobbing his head, and/or smiling.
  • the waiting animation includes cycle through repetitive animations with unique animations randomly interspersed within the repetitive animations.
  • the animation of John's avatar 610 waiting at FIG. 6 T (while John's avatar 610 has not been selected) is different from the animation of John's avatar 610 waiting at FIG. 6 E (while John's avatar 610 has been selected) because computer system 600 is in a different state (selection state of John's avatar 610 ).
  • Different animations of waiting based on the state of computer system 600 provides the user with feedback about the state of computer system 600 .
  • computer system 600 receives submission input 650 G (e.g., via activation of a return key on keyboard 600 C).
  • John's avatar 610 animates to indicate that the password is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 6 U , such as by the head of John's avatar 610 shaking side-to-side in disagreement and/or John's avatar 610 animating to a failure pose of a frown.
  • password entry field 622 A also moves side-to-side (e.g., multiple times), as shown in FIG.
  • John's avatar In response to receiving submission input 650 G and in accordance with a determination that the password in password entry field 622 A does correspond to (e.g., matches) the password for John's user account, John's avatar animates to a success pose to indicate that the password is correct, as shown in FIG. 6 V , then computer system 600 unlocks to display homepage 680 for John's user account, as shown in FIG. 6 W .
  • the success pose includes a smile and John's avatar 610 ceasing to animate (becomes static, maintaining the smile) as John's account logs in.
  • computer system 600 receives fingerprint information 650 H via fingerprint sensor 600 D, as shown in FIG. 6 T .
  • John's avatar 610 animates to the success pose to indicate that the received fingerprint information matches, as shown in FIG. 6 V , then computer system 600 unlocks to display homepage 680 for John's user account, as shown in FIG. 6 W .
  • John's avatar animates to indicate that the received fingerprint information does not match, as shown in FIG.
  • homepage 680 includes a plurality of icons 680 A that, when selected, display a corresponding application. For example, because computer system 600 is logged into John's user account, selecting the mail icon starts the mail application that displays John's email messages.
  • a messaging application 682 is displayed concurrently with John's contact information 684 (e.g., a part of an address book). Messaging application 682 uses the static pose of John's avatar 610 to represent John in a conversation with another user, where the other user is represented by avatar 618 .
  • the static pose of John's avatar 610 in messaging application 682 is the same as the static pose of John's avatar 610 at FIG. 6 A , which John previously selected.
  • John's contact information 684 uses the same static pose of John's avatar 610 to represent John.
  • John's avatar 610 is animated in messaging application 682 (e.g., to be directed at and/or follow a cursor).
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing an avatar on a lock screen using a computer system in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Method 700 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100 , 300 , 500 , or 600 ) (e.g., a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a smartphone, a tablet, and/or a smartwatch) that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices (e.g., a keyboard, a touch-sensitive surface, a computer mouse).
  • a computer system e.g., 100 , 300 , 500 , or 600
  • a laptop computer e.g., a desktop computer, a smartphone, a tablet, and/or a smartwatch
  • input devices e.g., a keyboard, a touch-sensitive surface, a computer mouse.
  • Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.
  • method 700 provides an intuitive way for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • the method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for using a lock screen, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
  • the computer system is in a locked state or an unlocked state.
  • the locked state the computer system is powered on and operational but is prevented from performing a predefined set of operations in response to user input.
  • the predefined set of operations optionally includes navigation between user interfaces, activation or deactivation of a predefined set of functions, and/or activation or deactivation of certain applications.
  • the locked state can be used to prevent unintentional or unauthorized use of some functionality of the computer system and/or activation or deactivation of some functions of the computer system.
  • the unlocked state the computer system is powered on and operational and is not prevented from performing at least a portion of the predefined set of operations that cannot be performed while in the locked state.
  • the computer system in the locked state When the computer system is in the locked state, the computer system is said to be locked. When the computer system is in the unlocked state, the computer system is said to be unlocked. In some embodiments, the computer system in the locked state optionally responds to a limited set of user inputs, including input that corresponds to an attempt to transition the computer system to the unlocked state or input that corresponds to powering the computer system off.
  • the computer system While the computer system (e.g., 600 ) is in a locked state ( 702 ), the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays ( 704 ), via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface (e.g., 602 ) that includes a first avatar (e.g., 610 , 612 , or 614 ) (e.g., a first avatar character and/or representing a first user account of the computer system) (and, optionally, concurrently with a second avatar different from the first avatar).
  • a first avatar e.g., 610 , 612 , or 614
  • a first avatar character and/or representing a first user account of the computer system e.g., a first avatar character and/or representing a first user account of the computer system
  • first input e.g., user input, input via a mouse or trackpad/touch-sensitive surface that moves a cursor on the lock screen user interface, (virtual or mechanical) keyboard input that enters a character into a password/passcode field of the lock screen user interface, and/or input (such as selection of a login button, activation of an enter button of a keyboard) that corresponds to a request to unlock the computer system).
  • first input e.g., user input, input via a mouse or trackpad/touch-sensitive surface that moves a cursor on the lock screen user interface, (virtual or mechanical) keyboard input that enters a character into a password/passcode field of the lock screen user interface, and/or input (such as selection of a login button, activation of an enter button of a keyboard) that corresponds to a request to unlock the computer system).
  • the computer system In response ( 708 ) to receiving the first input (and, optionally, while the computer system remains in the locked state), the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays (e.g., 710 ) (e.g., newly displaying and/or updating display of), via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element (e.g., 660 , 620 A, 622 A, or 622 B) of the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602 ) other than the first avatar (e.g., movement of a cursor and/or entry of characters into a password/passcode field) including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input (e.g., 650 A, 650 B, (parts of or all of) 650 C, 650 D, 650 E, 650 F, 650 G, or 650 H), the respective change is a first change ( 712 ) in the respective element (e.g., 660 , 620 A,
  • the first input is received while the respective element of the lock screen user interface is displayed, and the respective element changes (e.g., a location of the respective element changes, a visual characteristic of the respective element changes) in response to and based on the first input.
  • the degree of change in a visual characteristic of the respective element is based on a degree, duration, quantity, and/or direction of the first input.
  • a swipe input e.g., on a touch-sensitive surface
  • mouse input e.g., using a computer mouse
  • entry of multiple characters via a keyboard causes more changes to a password/passcode field as compared to entry of a single character via the keyboard.
  • the computer system In response ( 708 ) to receiving the first input (and, optionally, while the computer system remains in the locked state), the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays ( 716 ) (e.g., concurrently with display of the lock screen user interface object), via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar (e.g., 610 , 612 , or 614 in FIGS. 6 C- 6 D and 6 F- 6 H ) (and, optionally, the second avatar (e.g., 610 , 612 , or 614 in FIGS. 6 C- 6 D and FIGS.
  • the first avatar e.g., 610 , 612 , or 614 in FIGS. 6 C- 6 D and 6 F- 6 H
  • the second avatar e.g., 610 , 612 , or 614 in FIGS. 6 C- 6 D and FIGS.
  • a pose optionally includes a static pose or animated pose, such as an animated pose where the avatar character appears to be looking at a location on a display corresponding to the received first input.
  • the animated pose includes an amount of movement, such as changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character.
  • the animated pose includes changes in facial expression of the first avatar.
  • the animation of the first avatar is performed in response to receiving the first input. Changing a respective element of a lock screen user interface based on an input provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) (and, optionally, the second avatar (e.g., 612 and/or 614 )) is a three-dimensional avatar and the animation, over time, of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) transitioning through the plurality of poses includes a change in shape of the first avatar and/or a rotation of the first avatar.
  • the rotation of the first avatar includes rotation other than rotation in a plane of the display on which the first avatar is being displayed.
  • the rotation of the first avatar includes the head of the avatar turning left to look left, the head turning right to look right, the head turning up to look up, and/or the head turning down to look down.
  • the first avatar (e.g., the head of the first avatar) appears to rotate (e.g., concurrently) along two axis.
  • Changing a shape and/or rotation of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback that the system is active and that inputs will be processed. Further, inputs that affect the animation of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through the plurality of poses includes a first animation (and, optionally, a first pose) without including a second animation (and, optionally, without including a second pose).
  • the animation, over time, of the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) transitioning through the plurality of poses includes the second animation (and, optionally, the second pose) without including the first animation (and, optionally, without including the first pose).
  • the animations of the first avatar are based on the user input and different user inputs cause different animations of the first avatar.
  • the animation includes smooth transitions among multiple poses and/or the animation includes animated movement of the first avatar to transition among the multiple poses.
  • the second avatar transitions (concurrently with the first avatar) through a plurality of poses (e.g., different from the first avatar). Animating the first avatar differently based on the received input provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the respective element includes (e.g., is) a cursor (e.g., 660 ) displayed via the display generation component.
  • the first type of input is a first pointing device input (e.g., 654 A, 650 B, or 650 C) received via a pointing device (e.g., 600 B) (e.g., movement of a (e.g., wired or wireless) computer mouse; and/or movement of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface such as a trackpad, a touch screen, a touch bar, or a touch-sensitive mouse) that causes the cursor (e.g., 660 ) to move in the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602 ) (e.g., without occluding the first avatar).
  • a pointing device input e.g., 654 A, 650 B, or 650 C
  • a pointing device e.g., 600 B
  • a touch-sensitive surface such as a trackpad,
  • the second type of input is an input (e.g., 650 D, 650 F, 650 G, or 650 H) other than input that causes the cursor to move (e.g., a click input, a selection input, a typing input).
  • a cursor moving about the display provides the user with feedback about the location of the pointing device with respect to the element of the user interface.
  • the first avatar looking in the direction of the cursor provides the user with visual feedback about where on the display the user can find the cursor, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first change (or, alternatively, the second change) in the respective element of the lock screen user interface is an animated change in location (e.g., that does not pass over (e.g., occlude) the first avatar) of the cursor (e.g., while maintaining other visual appearances (e.g., size, color, and/or shape) of the cursor).
  • the plurality of poses includes: a first pose where the first avatar is looking in a direction of the cursor while the cursor is at a first display location; and a second pose, different from the first pose, where the first avatar is looking in a direction (e.g., different direction) of the cursor while the cursor is at a second display location.
  • the first avatar looks at the cursor (e.g., based on eye movement and/or head movement of the avatar) while the location of the cursor changes. In some embodiments, the first avatar ceases to look at the cursor based on the cursor not moving for a predetermined period of time.
  • the respective element includes (e.g., is) a cursor (e.g., 660 ) displayed via the display generation component.
  • the first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a second pointing device input (e.g., last portion of input 650 C) received via a pointing device (e.g., 600 B) (e.g., movement of a (e.g., wired or wireless) computer mouse; and/or movement of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface) that causes the cursor (e.g., 660 ) to move across the lock screen user interface to a location of the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) (or otherwise point at the first avatar and/or highlight the first avatar).
  • the second type of input is an input other than input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface to a location of the first avatar (e.g., a click input, a selection input, and/or a typing input).
  • the first avatar having different amounts of movement based on whether the in the direction of the cursor provides the user with visual feedback about where the cursor is located on the display, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first change (or, alternatively, the second change) in the respective element of the lock screen user interface is an animated change in location (e.g., that does not pass over (e.g., occlude) the first avatar) of the cursor (e.g., while maintaining other visual appearances (e.g., size, color, and/or shape) of the cursor).
  • the plurality of poses includes: a third pose (that is optionally different from the first and/or second pose) where the first avatar includes a first amount of movement (e.g., a non-zero amount of movement such as changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character) while the cursor is at a display location that does not occlude the first avatar, and a fourth pose, different from the third (and, optionally, different from the first and/or second) pose, where the first avatar includes a second amount of movement (e.g., a non-zero amount of movement such as changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character), different from the first amount of movement (e.g., more than or less than the first amount of movement), while the cursor is at a display location that does occlude the first avatar.
  • a third pose that is optionally different from the first and/or second pose
  • the first avatar includes a first amount of movement (e.g., a non-zero amount of movement such as changes in pitch,
  • the respective element includes (e.g., is) a cursor (e.g., 660 ) displayed via the display generation component.
  • the first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a third pointing device input (e.g., 650 D), received via a pointing device (e.g., 600 B) (e.g., depression (or other activation) of a button of a computer mouse; and/or contact on a touch-sensitive surface that exceeds a non-zero intensity threshold), corresponding to a press input (e.g., a press of a button or a pressure sensitive surface).
  • a press input e.g., a press of a button or a pressure sensitive surface.
  • the first change (or, alternatively, the second change) in the respective element of the lock screen user interface includes (e.g., is) a change in an appearance (e.g., size, color, and/or shape) of a selectable user interface object (e.g., 620 A- 620 C) in the lock screen user interface object (e.g., a button, text entry field, image, or other selectable user interface object).
  • the second type of input is an input other than input corresponding to press input (e.g., input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface).
  • press input e.g., input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface.
  • the first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a selection input (e.g., 650 D) corresponding to selection of the first avatar (e.g., received via a pointing device, such as a mouse click input when the cursor is pointing on (e.g., occluding the first avatar)) and the second type of input is an input other than a selection input corresponding to selection of the first avatar (e.g., typing input and/or input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface).
  • Animating the first avatar when the computer system detects selection of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that the first avatar has been selected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first avatar in response to receiving the first input (e.g., 650 D), displaying, via the display generation component, the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) sliding in a direction (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 6 L- 60 ) (e.g., towards a center of the lock screen user interface; translating; and/or moving in or along a direction from a first display location to a second display location).
  • displaying e.g., concurrently with display of the respective element
  • animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through the plurality of poses includes a first pose (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6 M ) based on the direction of sliding.
  • the animation in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is sliding in a first direction (e.g., to the right) (and/or in accordance with a determination that the starting position of the first avatar is on the left side of the display when the first input is received), includes a first sliding pose (e.g., head tilted to the left) (without including a second sliding pose) and in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is sliding in a second direction (e.g., to the left) different from the first direction (and/or in accordance with a determination that the starting position of the first avatar is on the right side of the display when the first input is received), the animation includes a second sliding pose (e.g., head tilted to the right) without including the first sliding pose.
  • a first sliding pose e.g., head tilted to the left
  • a second direction e.g., head tilted to the right
  • the plurality of poses includes the head of the first avatar tilting (e.g., tilting away and/or in a first direction) in concurrence with the first avatar sliding (e.g., the first avatar tilts in an opposite direction of the sliding).
  • the plurality of poses includes the head of the first avatar ceasing to tilt in the first direction and/or tilting in a different direction (e.g., the opposite direction and/or a second direction) in concurrence with the speed of sliding of the first avatar slowing down and/or stopping.
  • the computer system in response to receiving the first input, ceases to display (e.g., prior to sliding the first avatar) other avatars (e.g., that were displayed when the first input was received) corresponding to other accounts.
  • Animating the first avatar to slide e.g., towards a center of the lock screen user interface
  • the computer system detects selection of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that the first avatar has been selected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the computer system in response to receiving the first input, displays, an animation of the first avatar moving, including (e.g., as shown in FIG. 6 P ): in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is displayed in a first portion of the lock screen user interface (e.g., on a first side of the lock screen user interface), the animation of the first avatar moving includes movement of the first avatar in a first direction (e.g., the first avatar being dragged from the first side of the lock screen user interface to a predefined location such as a center of the lock screen user interface), and in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is displayed in a second portion of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first portion of the lock screen user interface (e.g., on a second side of the lock screen user interface), the animation of the first avatar moving includes movement of the first avatar in a second direction that is different from the first direction (e.g., the first avatar being dragged from the second side of the lock screen
  • the first avatar faces a third direction and/or the head of the first avatar tilts in the third direction based on the movement of the first avatar being in the first direction. In some embodiments, the first avatar faces a fourth direction and/or the head of the first avatar tilts in the fourth direction based on the movement of the first avatar being in the second direction.
  • the speed at which the first avatar moves in the first/second direction is based on a starting location and/or distance of movement of the first avatar (e.g., longer distance to move to the predefined location results in faster speed). In some embodiments, the first avatar moves at a faster speed and/or reaches a higher speed of movement when the first avatar starts further from the predefined location as compared to when the first avatar starts closer to the predefined location.
  • the computer system in response to a determination that user input has not been received (at the computer system) for a first predetermined period of time, the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays, via the display generation component, an inactivity animation (e.g., as shown in FIG.
  • first avatar e.g., 610
  • second avatar e.g., 612 or 614
  • an animation indicating inactivity for the first predetermined period of time has elapsed
  • an animation of the first (and/or second) avatar sleeping e.g., eyes closed
  • an animation of the first (and/or second) avatar being bored e.g., a second avatar
  • a display state of the display generation component e.g., dimming the display and/or turning off the display.
  • Animating the first avatar to indicate that no activity has been detected for the first predetermined period of time provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that no inputs have been received.
  • the animation of the first avatar that no activity has been detected for the first predetermined period of time also provides the user with a warning that the computer system will take further action (e.g., dim or turn off display) if no activity continues to be detected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first type of input includes (e.g., is) entering characters (e.g., 600 F) in a password entry field (e.g., 622 A) (e.g., consisting of numeric, alphabetical, and/or non-alphanumeric characters).
  • a password entry field e.g., 622 A
  • Changing a respective element of a lock screen user interface based on an input entering characters in the password entry field provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the computer system receives a request (e.g., 600 C, 650 G, and/or 650 H) to unlock the computer system (e.g., 600 ) including providing authentication information (e.g., a password/passcode, or biometric authentication).
  • a request e.g., 600 C, 650 G, and/or 650 H
  • authentication information e.g., a password/passcode, or biometric authentication
  • the computer system In response to receiving the request to unlock the computer system, the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) transitioning through a plurality of poses includes: in accordance with a determination that the request to unlock the computer system corresponds to (e.g., results in) a successful login attempt (e.g., correct password is submitted), changing the appearance of the first avatar to a first appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG.
  • a successful login attempt e.g., correct password is submitted
  • the first avatar reacts differently when a correct password is submitted as compared to when an incorrect password is submitted.
  • the password entry field shakes (e.g., left-to-right and right-to-left) to indicate that the password is wrong (e.g., the respective change is a shake in the password entry field).
  • Changing a respective element of a lock screen user interface based on whether a request to unlock the computer system is successful provides the user with visual feedback about the input that has been received and about whether the computer system will remain locked or be unlocked, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • Providing different animations of the first avatar based on whether the request to unlock the computer system is successful similarly provides the user with visual feedback about the input that has been received and about whether the computer system will remain locked or be unlocked, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6 V ) is a static pose (e.g., the first avatar smiling without additional head movement) and the second appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6 U ) is an animated appearance (e.g., the first avatar includes an animated reaction and/or the animation includes head movement).
  • Displaying a static pose when the password is successful as compared to an animated appearance when the password is not successful provides the user with visual feedback about the password that has been received and about whether the computer system will remain locked or be unlocked, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the second type of input includes (e.g., is) a request for a password hint (e.g., selection of an option requesting that the electronic device provide (e.g., display) a hint as to what the password is) (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6 Q ).
  • a password hint e.g., selection of an option requesting that the electronic device provide (e.g., display) a hint as to what the password is
  • FIG. 6 Q Providing a different animation of the first avatar when a request is received for a hint of what the password is (as compared to another input, such as input to submit password) provides the user with visual feedback about the input that has been received and about what information computer system will provide (e.g., the hint), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • detecting entry of characters e.g., 650 F
  • characters of a (e.g., correct or incorrect) password e.g., characters of a (e.g., correct or incorrect) password
  • a text entry field e.g., 622 A
  • the entry of the characters includes keyboard input.
  • the computer system In response to detecting the entry of characters in the text entry field (e.g., 622 A), the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays, via the display generation component, the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) paying attention to (e.g., glancing at or in the direction of) a text entry field (such as a password entry field) into which the characters are being entered (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6 R ).
  • a text entry field such as a password entry field
  • FIG. 6 R Providing a different animation of the first avatar when text is being entered into the text entry field provides the user with visual feedback about the input that is being received.
  • the first avatar paying attention to the text entry field provides the user with feedback about the location at which the received input is being entered into the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the computer system subsequent to displaying the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) glancing at (e.g., in the direction of) the text entry field (e.g., 622 A) (e.g., a password entry field) into which the characters are being entered, the computer system (e.g., 600 ) detects that characters have not been entered into the text entry field for at least a predetermined amount of time.
  • the computer system In response to detecting that characters have not been entered into the text entry field (e.g., 622 A) for at least the predetermined amount of time, the computer system (e.g., 600 ) displays (e.g., after detecting that text entry into the password entry field has ended and/or after determining that text has not been entered into the password entry field for a predefined amount of time), via the display generation component, an animation of the first avatar transitioning to a pose (e.g., 610 as in FIGS.
  • a pose e.g., 610 as in FIGS.
  • the computer system e.g., 600
  • a second predetermined period of time e.g., that is different from or less than the first predetermined period of time
  • Providing animations of the first avatar when user input is not received provides the user with visual feedback that input the user may be trying to enter has not been received and/or that the computer system is waiting on the user to provide input to change the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the animation of the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) indicating that the computer system (e.g., 600 ) is waiting for user input is based on a state of the computer system, including: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a first state, the animation of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input is a first waiting animation (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6 E ), and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a second state, the animation of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input is a second waiting animation (e.g., 610 in FIG.
  • the first state is a state in which a plurality of avatars are displayed for selection and the second state is a state in which an avatar (such as the first avatar) of the plurality of avatars has been selected (and, optionally, a password entry field is displayed).
  • the animation of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input is a third waiting animation (different from the first and second waiting animations).
  • the computer system while displaying the animation of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input, user input is received. In response to receiving the user input, the computer system ceases to display the animation of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input. Providing different animations of the first avatar based on the state of the computer system when user input is not received provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and what type of information should be entered into the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • a waiting animation e.g., 610 , 612 , and/or 614 in FIG. 6 E ; or 610 in FIG.
  • a repeating animation that includes multiple repetitions of the same behavior (e.g., repeatedly (e.g., twice, thrice, or four times) and/or with other animations interspersed before/between/after the multiple first waiting animations); a first emphasis animation that is different from the repeating animation and is selected (e.g., randomly or pseudo-randomly) from a set of emphasis animations that includes three or more different emphasis animations, wherein in some embodiments, the set of emphasis animations includes a large number of emphasis animations (e.g., more than 20, more than 50, or more than 100 emphasis animations) so that the behavior of the avatar does not appear to repeat itself for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, or 2 hours); the repeating animation; a second emphasis animation that is different from the repeating animation and is selected from the set of emphasis animations; and the repeating animation.
  • a threshold amount of time e.g., 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, or 2 hours
  • some of the animations of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input are used three, four, five, or more times as often as particular other animations of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input.
  • Providing animations of the first avatar to indicate that the computer system is waiting for user input provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that information should be entered into the computer system to proceed, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • an animation of the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) indicating that the computer system (e.g., 600 ) is waiting for user input includes a first amount of movement (e.g., rotating, facial expressions, nodding, changing in size, changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character) of the first avatar when the computer system is in a state in which the first avatar has been selected from among a plurality of avatars (e.g., as in FIG.
  • an animation of the first avatar e.g., 610 ) indicating that the computer system (e.g., 600 ) is waiting for user input includes a second amount of movement (e.g., rotating, facial expressions, nodding, changing in size, changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character), greater than the first amount of movement, of the first avatar when the computer system is in a state in which the first avatar has not been selected from among the plurality of avatars (e.g., as in FIG.
  • a second amount of movement e.g., rotating, facial expressions, nodding, changing in size, changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character
  • the first avatar is more attentive, reacts more frequently, and/or is more active when the first avatar has been selected (e.g., from among the plurality of avatars) as compared to when the first avatar has not been selected (e.g., no avatar has been selected from among the plurality of avatars).
  • Providing animations with greater movement of the first avatar when the avatar has been selected and less movement of the first avatar when the avatar has not been selected provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and whether the avatar and corresponding user account has been selected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the computer system displays, via the display generation component and concurrently with the first avatar (e.g., 610 ), a password entry field (e.g., 622 A) (e.g., text entry field into which characters of a password/passcode can to be entered in response to a text entry input while the text entry field is selected).
  • a password entry field e.g., 622 A
  • Concurrently displaying the password entry field with the first avatar enables the computer system to provide the user with feedback about the password entry field (such as whether text is being entered into the password entry field) through various animations of the first avatar, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the lock screen user interface is a password entry user interface (e.g., 602 at FIG. 60 ).
  • the computer system e.g., 600
  • detects, via one or more user input devices e.g., a pointing device, a hardware keyboard, and/or a virtual keyboard
  • selection e.g., 650 D
  • the password entry user interface e.g., 602 at FIG.
  • the password entry user interface includes a password entry field, a submit button for submitting the entered password, a password hint button for receiving a password hint, and/or a password reset button for resetting the password. Displaying the password entry user interface when the first avatar is selected (e.g., clicked on) provides the user with feedback that a password should be entered to proceed (e.g., to proceed to unlock the computer system), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the computer system while the computer system (e.g., 600 ) is in the locked state, the computer system (e.g., 600 ) concurrently displays in the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602 at FIGS. 6 A- 6 K ), via the display generation component, a plurality of avatars (e.g., 610 , 612 , and 614 ) including the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) and a second avatar (e.g., 612 or 614 ) (e.g., a second avatar character and/or representing a second user account of the computer system different from the first user account) that is different from the first avatar.
  • a plurality of avatars e.g., 610 , 612 , and 614
  • the first avatar e.g., 610
  • a second avatar e.g., 612 or 614
  • a second avatar character and/or representing a second user account of the computer system different from the first user account e.g.,
  • the computer system displays a plurality of avatars other than the first avatar, wherein each avatar of the plurality of avatars corresponds to a different user account of the computer system. Displaying one or more additional avatars enables the computer system to provide the user with a mechanism to access different user accounts to log into (e.g., by clicking on the avatar and entering the correct password), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) and the second avatar (e.g., 612 or 614 ) are concurrently animated (e.g., the computer system animates both avatars to look at a (same) location of the cursor, the computer system animates both avatars based on the state of the computer system, the computer system animates both avatars independent of each other).
  • the lock screen user interface includes a plurality of avatars, including the first avatar and the second avatar, wherein each avatar corresponds to a different user account.
  • the second avatar is also animated and the animations are, optionally, based on the input (or lack of input) that is received. Concurrently displaying the first avatar with other avatars provides the user with additional indications of the user input being received and the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • concurrently displaying the plurality of avatars includes animating an avatar (e.g., 610 ) that has a current input focus (e.g., an avatar that has been selected or is the subject of user input such as a cursor hover or user gaze direction) with an active animation style (e.g., an animation style that includes more dramatic and/or faster movements than a non-active animation style and/or an animation style that responds to a larger number of different user inputs or responds more prominently to user inputs than a non-active animation style) that is not used for avatars that do not have the current input focus, including: in accordance with a determination that the first avatar (e.g., 610 ) has current input focus (e.g., as in FIG.
  • a current input focus e.g., an avatar that has been selected or is the subject of user input such as a cursor hover or user gaze direction
  • an active animation style e.g., an animation style that includes more dramatic and/or faster movements than a non-active animation style
  • the computer system concurrently displays the first avatar with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the second avatar with the active animation style); and in accordance with a determination that the second avatar (e.g., 612 ) has current input focus (e.g., as in FIG. 6 J ), the computer system (e.g., 600 ) concurrently displays the second avatar (e.g., 612 ) with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the first avatar with the active animation style).
  • the active animation style is applied to one avatar at a time and the non-active animation style is applied to multiple other avatars that do not have the current input focus.
  • the respective avatar is displayed with the active animation style while other avatars are displayed with the non-active animation style.
  • Presenting an avatar that is highlighted (e.g., via a mouse over) with a different animation style as compared to avatars that are not highlighted provides the user with visual feedback about which avatar is highlighted/in focus and on which actions will be performed, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • concurrently displaying the plurality of avatars includes animating the plurality of avatars with a non-active animation style. While displaying the plurality of avatars with the non-active animation style, the computer system (e.g., 600 ) detects that an input focus has been directed to a respective avatar of the plurality of avatars (e.g., an avatar that has been selected or is subject of user input such as a cursor hover or user gaze direction) (e.g., as in FIGS. 6 I- 6 K ).
  • a respective avatar of the plurality of avatars e.g., an avatar that has been selected or is subject of user input such as a cursor hover or user gaze direction
  • changing the respective avatar from the non-active animation style to an active animation style including: in accordance with a determination that the first avatar has current input focus, concurrently displaying the first avatar with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the second avatar with the active animation style and/or without displaying the second avatar); and in accordance with a determination that the second avatar has current input focus, concurrently displaying the second avatar with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the first avatar with the active animation style and/or without displaying the first avatar).
  • Presenting an avatar that is being focused on (e.g., selected) with a different animation style as compared to avatars that are not highlighted provides the user with visual feedback about which avatar is highlighted/in
  • animating the first avatar and animating the second avatar includes selecting animations for the first avatar and the second avatar so as to avoid concurrently displaying the same or similar animations for the first avatar and the second avatar.
  • a plurality of avatars e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, or more avatars
  • the computer system selects animations for the avatars (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, or more avatars) so as to avoid concurrently displaying the same or similar animation for two avatars.
  • the computer system selects, for display, the animation of the first avatar transitioning through the plurality of poses based on the second avatar (and, optionally, other (e.g., all) avatars of the plurality of displayed avatars) not being concurrently animated using the animation.
  • the computer system proactively avoids playing the same animation for multiple different avatars.
  • animations are selected such that multiple avatars do not play the same animation at the same time.
  • animations are selects such that the same animation was not recently played (e.g., within a predetermined period of time, within a predetermined number of played animations) for the first avatar being animated and/or for other displayed avatars.
  • Proactively avoiding playing the same animation for multiple different avatars provides the user with feedback that the avatars are not linked together (e.g., correspond to different user accounts), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • the first avatar (e.g., displayed as part of the lock screen user interface) is static while an operating system of the computer system is loading (e.g., not animated for a non-zero duration of time and/or not animated for the entire duration of the operating system loading) (and, optionally, while the computer system is in the locked state).
  • Displaying a static avatar, rather than an animated avatar, while an operating system of the computer system is loading reduces the need for processing power for the avatar, enabling the operating system to load more quickly, and to provide the user with visual feedback that the operating system is loading, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • transitioning in response to a determination that the operating system has finished loading, transitioning (e.g., center the first avatar and/or performing a crossfade animation) display, via the display generation component, of the first avatar from being static to being animated. Transitioning an avatar from being a static avatar to an animated avatar provides the user with feedback that the operating system has finished loading, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • a pose of the first avatar corresponds to (e.g., is the same as) a user-selected pose associated with user contact information (e.g., as shown in 684 ) for the user account corresponding to the first avatar.
  • the pose of the first avatar (while static) is the same as the pose that the user of the user account selected to represent the user in a contact (e.g., in an electronic address book).
  • the pose of the first avatar is selected based on the user having previously selected that pose for the first avatar to represent the user (e.g., in a contact listing of an electronic address book). Displaying the static avatar using a previously user-selected pose associated with user contact information for the user account provides the user with feedback about which account the avatar corresponds to, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person.
  • personal information data can include demographic data, location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records relating to a user's health or level of fitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information, and/or exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.
  • the present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users.
  • the personal information data can be used to present relevant avatars.
  • other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure.
  • health and fitness data may be used to provide insights into a user's general wellness, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellness goals.
  • the present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices.
  • such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure.
  • Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes.
  • Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures.
  • policies and practices should be adapted for the particular types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US, collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country.
  • HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
  • the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data.
  • the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or anytime thereafter.
  • users can select not to provide personal information when accessing a lock screen.
  • the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user may be notified upon downloading an app that their personal information data will be accessed and then reminded again just before personal information data is accessed by the app.
  • personal information data should be managed and handled in a way to minimize risks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once it is no longer needed.
  • data de-identification can be used to protect a user's privacy. De-identification may be facilitated, when appropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g., collecting location data a city level rather than at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods.
  • the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data.

Abstract

The present disclosure generally relates to an avatar on a lock screen. A received user input causes a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen other than the avatar and an animation is displayed, over time, of the avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 17/736,925, filed May 4, 2022, and entitled “TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING AN AVATAR ON A LOCK SCREEN,” which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/197,209, filed Jun. 4, 2021, and entitled “TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING AN AVATAR ON A LOCK SCREEN,” the entire contents of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • FIELD
  • The present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more specifically to techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen user interface.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Some computer systems display lock screens, which indicate to a user that the computer system is powered on and locked. For example, a computer system may display a lock screen when the system is turned on, when the system is restarted, or when a user is logged out.
  • BRIEF SUMMARY
  • Some techniques for managing lock screens using electronic devices, however, are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.
  • Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen. Methods and interfaces of the present technique optionally complement or replace other methods for managing avatars. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. Methods and interfaces of the present technique also provide the user with visual feedback about the inputs being received at the device and the state of the device.
  • In accordance with some embodiments, a method is described. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar.
  • In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar.
  • In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar.
  • In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices. The computer system comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar.
  • In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices. The computer system comprises: means, while the computer system is in a locked state, for: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and means, responsive to receiving the first input, for: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar.
  • In accordance with some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the computer system is in a locked state: displaying, via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface that includes a first avatar; and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar, receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input; and in response to receiving the first input: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input, the respective change is a first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface; and displaying, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface other than the first avatar.
  • Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
  • Thus, devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace other methods for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIGS. 6A-6X illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen.
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing an avatar on a lock screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS
  • The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, and the like. It should be recognized, however, that such description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure but is instead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.
  • There is a need for electronic devices that provide efficient methods and interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen. For example, the animations of the avatar provide the user with visual feedback about what inputs are being received at the device and about the state of the device. Such techniques can reduce the cognitive burden on a user who use lock screens, thereby enhancing productivity. Further, such techniques can reduce processor and battery power otherwise wasted on redundant user inputs.
  • Below, FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5B provide a description of exemplary devices for performing the techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen. FIGS. 6A-6X illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen. FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing an avatar on a lock screen in accordance with some embodiments.
  • The processes described below enhance the operability of the devices and make the user-device interfaces more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) through various techniques, including by providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls, performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, and/or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and improve battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • In addition, in methods described herein where one or more steps are contingent upon one or more conditions having been met, it should be understood that the described method can be repeated in multiple repetitions so that over the course of the repetitions all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met in different repetitions of the method. For example, if a method requires performing a first step if a condition is satisfied, and a second step if the condition is not satisfied, then a person of ordinary skill would appreciate that the claimed steps are repeated until the condition has been both satisfied and not satisfied, in no particular order. Thus, a method described with one or more steps that are contingent upon one or more conditions having been met could be rewritten as a method that is repeated until each of the conditions described in the method has been met. This, however, is not required of system or computer readable medium claims where the system or computer readable medium contains instructions for performing the contingent operations based on the satisfaction of the corresponding one or more conditions and thus is capable of determining whether the contingency has or has not been satisfied without explicitly repeating steps of a method until all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met. A person having ordinary skill in the art would also understand that, similar to a method with contingent steps, a system or computer readable storage medium can repeat the steps of a method as many times as are needed to ensure that all of the contingent steps have been performed.
  • Although the following description uses terms “first,” “second,” etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. In some embodiments, these terms are used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first touch could be termed a second touch, and, similarly, a second touch could be termed a first touch, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. In some embodiments, the first touch and the second touch are two separate references to the same touch. In some embodiments, the first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch.
  • The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.
  • The term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
  • Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touchpad). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system that is in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with a display generation component. The display generation component is configured to provide visual output, such as display via a CRT display, display via an LED display, or display via image projection. In some embodiments, the display generation component is integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the display generation component is separate from the computer system. As used herein, “displaying” content includes causing to display the content (e.g., video data rendered or decoded by display controller 156) by transmitting, via a wired or wireless connection, data (e.g., image data or video data) to an integrated or external display generation component to visually produce the content.
  • In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.
  • The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
  • The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.
  • Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays. FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.” Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.
  • As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).
  • As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
  • It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.
  • Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100.
  • Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)) and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.
  • RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.
  • Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111. Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
  • I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to peripherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, depth camera controller 169, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 116. The other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208, FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, FIG. 2 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system that is in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with one or more input devices. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a trackpad, as part of a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include one or more camera sensors (e.g., one or more optical sensors 164 and/or one or more depth camera sensors 175), such as for tracking a user's gestures (e.g., hand gestures and/or air gestures) as input. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices are integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices are separate from the computer system. In some embodiments, an air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independently of an input element that is a part of the device) and is based on detected motion of a portion of the user's body through the air including motion of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., an angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or a distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), relative to another portion of the user's body (e.g., movement of a hand of the user relative to a shoulder of the user, movement of one hand of the user relative to another hand of the user, and/or movement of a finger of the user relative to another finger or portion of a hand of the user), and/or absolute motion of a portion of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes movement of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and/or speed, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a portion of the user's body).
  • A quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touch screen 112 or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed Dec. 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 206) optionally turns power to device 100 on or off. The functionality of one or more of the buttons are, optionally, user-customizable. Touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
  • Touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 112. Touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to user-interface objects.
  • Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 112 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.
  • Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is, optionally, analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Pat. No. 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), U.S. Pat. No. 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or U.S. Pat. No. 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, whereas touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
  • A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is described in the following applications: (1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jul. 30, 2004; (4) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 31, 2005; (5) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/038,590, “Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed Jan. 18, 2005; (6) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; (7) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; (8) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard,” filed Sep. 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed Mar. 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touch screen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
  • In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
  • Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem 106. Optical sensor 164 optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 164 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 164 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more depth camera sensors 175. FIG. 1A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to depth camera controller 169 in I/O subsystem 106. Depth camera sensor 175 receives data from the environment to create a three dimensional model of an object (e.g., a face) within a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a depth camera sensor). In some embodiments, in conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), depth camera sensor 175 is optionally used to determine a depth map of different portions of an image captured by the imaging module 143. In some embodiments, a depth camera sensor is located on the front of device 100 so that the user's image with depth information is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display and to capture selfies with depth map data. In some embodiments, the depth camera sensor 175 is located on the back of device, or on the back and the front of the device 100. In some embodiments, the position of depth camera sensor 175 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a depth camera sensor 175 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
  • In some embodiments, a depth map (e.g., depth map image) contains information (e.g., values) that relates to the distance of objects in a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor). In one embodiment of a depth map, each depth pixel defines the position in the viewpoint's Z-axis where its corresponding two-dimensional pixel is located. In some embodiments, a depth map is composed of pixels wherein each pixel is defined by a value (e.g., 0-255). For example, the “0” value represents pixels that are located at the most distant place in a “three dimensional” scene and the “255” value represents pixels that are located closest to a viewpoint (e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor) in the “three dimensional” scene. In other embodiments, a depth map represents the distance between an object in a scene and the plane of the viewpoint. In some embodiments, the depth map includes information about the relative depth of various features of an object of interest in view of the depth camera (e.g., the relative depth of eyes, nose, mouth, ears of a user's face). In some embodiments, the depth map includes information that enables the device to determine contours of the object of interest in a z direction.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165. FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166. FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is, optionally, coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Proximity sensor 166 optionally performs as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; Ser. No. 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; Ser. No. 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and Ser. No. 11/638,251, “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals,” which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. FIG. 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.
  • Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG. 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled to an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. Accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.
  • In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3 ) stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3 . Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and input control devices 116; and location information concerning the device's location and/or attitude.
  • Operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
  • Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
  • Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.
  • In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).
  • Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.
  • Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
  • In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.
  • Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.
  • Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input).
  • GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
  • Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
      • Contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);
      • Telephone module 138;
      • Video conference module 139;
      • E-mail client module 140;
      • Instant messaging (IM) module 141;
      • Workout support module 142;
      • Camera module 143 for still and/or video images;
      • Image management module 144;
      • Video player module;
      • Music player module;
      • Browser module 147;
      • Calendar module 148;
      • Widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6;
      • Widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;
      • Search module 151;
      • Video and music player module 152, which merges video player module and music player module;
      • Notes module 153;
      • Map module 154; and/or
      • Online video module 155.
  • Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 are, optionally, used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138, video conference module 139, e-mail 140, or IM 141; and so forth.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contacts module 137, and telephone module 138, video conference module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 102.
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external, connected display via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
  • In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
  • In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Jun. 20, 2007, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed Dec. 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)), procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module is, optionally, combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 152, FIG. 1A). In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.
  • The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3 ) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390).
  • Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.
  • In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
  • Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.
  • In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
  • In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173.
  • Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
  • Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
  • Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
  • Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.
  • Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 182.
  • In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.
  • In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.
  • A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).
  • Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
  • Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (e.g., 187-1 and/or 187-2) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display 112, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.
  • In some embodiments, event definitions 186 include a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
  • In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (187) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.
  • When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
  • In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
  • In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.
  • In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
  • In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.
  • In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
  • It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
  • Device 100 optionally also include one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally, executed on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112.
  • In some embodiments, device 100 includes touch screen 112, menu button 204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210, headset jack 212, and docking/charging external port 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A) optionally does not store these modules.
  • Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 3 is, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or computer programs (e.g., sets of instructions or including instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)), procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that are, optionally, implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
      • Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;
      • Time 404;
      • Bluetooth indicator 405;
      • Battery status indicator 406;
      • Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
        • Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;
        • Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails;
        • Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and
        • Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and
      • Icons for other applications, such as:
        • Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;”
        • Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;”
        • Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;”
        • Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;”
        • Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;”
        • Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;”
        • Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;”
        • Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;”
        • Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;”
        • Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;”
        • Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and
        • Icon 446 for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.
  • It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112). Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 359) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.
  • Although some of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B) on the display (e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.
  • Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500 includes body 502. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., FIGS. 1A-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has touch-sensitive display screen 504, hereafter touch screen 504. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in some embodiments, touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 500.
  • Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2013/169849, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed Nov. 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508, if included, can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 500 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.
  • FIG. 5B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1A, 1B, and 3. Device 500 has bus 512 that operatively couples I/O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518. I/O section 514 can be connected to display 504, which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, intensity sensor 524 (e.g., contact intensity sensor). In addition, I/O section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device 500 can include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508. Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.
  • Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514.
  • Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 516, for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including process 700 (FIG. 7 ). A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discs based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies, as well as persistent solid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like. Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.
  • As used here, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on the display screen of devices 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIGS. 1A, 3, and 5A-5B). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each optionally constitute an affordance.
  • As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
  • As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.
  • For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
  • As used herein, an “installed application” refers to a software application that has been downloaded onto an electronic device (e.g., devices 100, 300, and/or 500) and is ready to be launched (e.g., become opened) on the device. In some embodiments, a downloaded application becomes an installed application by way of an installation program that extracts program portions from a downloaded package and integrates the extracted portions with the operating system of the computer system.
  • As used herein, the terms “open application” or “executing application” refer to a software application with retained state information (e.g., as part of device/global internal state 157 and/or application internal state 192). An open or executing application is, optionally, any one of the following types of applications:
      • an active application, which is currently displayed on a display screen of the device that the application is being used on;
      • a background application (or background processes), which is not currently displayed, but one or more processes for the application are being processed by one or more processors; and
      • a suspended or hibernated application, which is not running, but has state information that is stored in memory (volatile and non-volatile, respectively) and that can be used to resume execution of the application.
  • As used herein, the term “closed application” refers to software applications without retained state information (e.g., state information for closed applications is not stored in a memory of the device). Accordingly, closing an application includes stopping and/or removing application processes for the application and removing state information for the application from the memory of the device. Generally, opening a second application while in a first application does not close the first application. When the second application is displayed and the first application ceases to be displayed, the first application becomes a background application.
  • Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UP”) and associated processes that are implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500.
  • FIGS. 6A-6X illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing an avatar on a lock screen, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in FIG. 7 .
  • FIG. 6A illustrates a computer system 600 that is a laptop computer with display 600A, touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad) 600B, keyboard 600C, and fingerprint sensor 600D. Computer system 600 optionally includes the same features as described above with respect to electronic devices 100, 300, and/or 500. At FIG. 6A, computer system 600 has been turned on and lock screen 602 is being displayed. Initially, lock screen 602 includes an indication 604 that computer system 600 is still loading an operating system. In some embodiments, the computer system does not process some types of inputs while the operating system is loading, such as inputs received at a pointing device (e.g., at touch-sensitive surface 600B and/or at a computer mouse). During at least a portion (e.g., a non-zero time period) of the loading phase, avatars 610-616 are displayed with static poses, meaning avatars 610-616 are not animated (e.g., until the operating system finishes loading). Avatars 610-614 represent user accounts configured on computer system 600. Guest avatar 616 represents a guest account that can be used to access some features of computer system 600 by a user that does not have an existing user account. Avatars 610-614 are displayed based on previously having been selected by the respective users to represent the users. The static poses of avatars 610-614 (illustrated in FIG. 6A) are poses that have been previously selected by the respective users as the pose to use to represent the users, such as in a contact card (e.g., 684 of FIG. 6X) of the user and/or in instant messaging conversations (e.g., 682 of FIG. 6X) in which the user is a participant, as will be described in further detail with respective to FIG. 6X.
  • For example, John has previously selected avatar 610 to represent his user account (e.g., selected when the user account was created). Additionally, John selected a particular pose of avatar 610 to represent his user account, as shown in the static pose of John's avatar 610 at FIG. 6A. Similarly, Jane and Sam have previously selected avatars 612 and 614 to represent them, respectively. Jane and Sam have also previously selected the particular poses of avatars 612 and 614 to represent them, as shown in the static poses of Jane's avatar 612 and Sam's avatar 614 in FIG. 6A.
  • At FIG. 6B, after the operating system of computer system 600 has loaded, avatars 610-614 are animated. Computer system 600 displays a smooth transition between avatars 610-614 of FIG. 6A when they are static and avatars 610-614 when they are animated, such as by centering the static avatar in the respective circles (where the circle does not move during the smooth transition) and cross-fading between the static and animated versions of the respective avatars 610-614. Avatars 610-614 are animated with a three dimensional appearance, with the animations includes changes in facial expression, shape, location, size, and/or rotation (one, two, or three axes) of the avatar. At FIG. 6B, the operating system of computer system 600 has loaded and no further user input has been received at the system. As a result, at FIG. 6B, avatars 610-614 cycle through various animations to indicate to the user that the avatars can be selected to log into a respective user account. Additionally, at FIG. 6B, computer system 600 displays shutdown option 620A, restart option 620B, and sleep option 620. Shutdown option 620A, when selected, causes computer system 600 to shut down. Restart option 620B, when selected, causes computer system 600 to restart. Sleep option 620, when selected, causes computer system 600 to enter a low power mode.
  • Throughout FIGS. 6B-6K, although avatars 610-614 are animated at the same time, computer system 600 manages the animations of avatars 610-614 such that they do not concurrently perform the same animation. Guest avatar 616 is static (e.g., not animated, and/or maintains the same size and position) throughout FIGS. 6A-6G and 6I-6K.
  • At FIG. 6B, computer system 600 detects a first pointer-movement input (e.g., swipe gesture 650A at touch sensitive surface 600B or a mouse movement). In response to detecting the first pointer-movement input, computer system 600 changes the position of cursor 660 on display 600A, as shown in FIGS. 6B-6D. As cursor 660 begins to move across lock screen 602, avatars 610-614 animate to look in the direction of the cursor, such as by turning their head and/or moving their eyes. This provides the user with feedback that computer system 600 has received user input and indicates to the user where the cursor is located on display 600A and/or lock screen 602. As cursor 660 moves on display 600A from the position in FIG. 6B to that of FIG. 6C and then to that of FIG. 6D, avatars 610-614 continue to animate to look in the direction of cursor 660 in conjunction with the movement of cursor 660. The movement of cursor 660 is based on, e.g., the movement of swipe gesture 650A or movement of a mouse (or other pointing device, e.g., 350) in communication with computer system 600.
  • At FIG. 6E, computer system 600 has stopped receiving inputs at touch sensitive surface 600B for a first predetermined amount of time, such as for 5 seconds or 10 seconds. As a result, avatars 610-614 cease to look in the direction of the cursor while continuing to animate while waiting for user input. The animation while waiting for user input includes, for example, avatars 610-614 looking around, bobbing their heads, and/or smiling. In some embodiments, the waiting animation includes cycling through repetitive animations with unique animations randomly interspersed within the repetitive animations. During these animations of waiting for user input, avatars 610-614 are animated at the same time, but computer system 600 selects the animations of avatars 610-614 so that they do not concurrently perform the same animation. In some embodiments, the same movements are performed by avatars 610-614 as part of the waiting animation, but at different times.
  • At FIG. 6F, computer system 600 has continued to not receive user inputs (e.g., at touch-sensitive surface 600B, at keyboard 600C, and at fingerprint sensor 600D) since the first pointer-movement input in FIGS. 6B-6C (e.g., swipe gesture 650A) for a second predetermined amount of time (longer than the first predetermined amount of time), such as for 1 minute or 2 minutes. Cursor 660 has remained in the same position in FIGS. 6D-6F. As a result of not having received user inputs for the second predetermined amount of time, avatars 610-614 animate to sleeping appearances, as shown in FIG. 6F. In some embodiments, the sleeping appearances include closed eyes, though avatars 610-614 optionally continue to animate with different movements (e.g., moving their heads with eyes closed and/or shifting from side to side).
  • At FIG. 6F, while avatars 610-614 have varying sleeping appearances, computer system 600 begins to detect a second pointer-movement input (e.g., swipe gesture 650B on touch-sensitive surface 600B or movement of a mouse). In response to detecting the second pointer-movement input, cursor 660 moves across lock screen 602. Avatars 610-614 look in the direction of cursor 660 and follow cursor 660 as it moves across lock screen 602, as shown in FIG. 6G. As further illustrated in FIG. 6G, swipe gesture 650B causes cursor 660 to move to shutdown option 620A, causing shutdown option 620A to change color to reflect that focus has been placed on shutdown option 620A. The direction in which each of avatars 610-614 is looking at cursor 660 differs because of their different respective positions on lock screen 602.
  • At FIG. 6G, computer system 600 begins to detect a drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600B, which moves cursor 660 to guest avatar 616, as shown in FIG. 6H. At FIG. 6H, because the focus of cursor 660 is on guest avatar 616, guest avatar 616 optionally enlarges (e.g., as compared to FIG. 6G). Avatars 610-614 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • At FIG. 6H, computer system 600 continues to detect the drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600B, which moves cursor 660 to Sam's avatar 614, as shown in FIG. 6I. At FIG. 6I, because the focus of cursor 660 is no longer on guest avatar 616, guest avatar 616 reduces in size. Because the focus of cursor 660 is on Sam's avatar 614, Sam's avatar 614 becomes more attentive and/or more active, and optionally becomes larger, as compared to when the focus of cursor 660 was not on Sam's avatar 614. The animated expression of Sam's avatar 614 also changes to one of excitement. Sam's avatar 614 stops looking at or following cursor 660 when the focus of cursor 660 is on Sam's avatar 614. Avatars 610-612 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • At FIG. 6I, computer system 600 continues to detect a drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600B, which moves cursor 660 from Sam's avatar 614 to Jane's avatar 612, as shown in FIG. 6J. At FIG. 6J, because the focus of cursor 660 is no longer on Sam's avatar 614, Sam's avatar 614 becomes less attentive, and optionally gets smaller and less animated (e.g., less movement as compared to when the focus was on Sam's avatar 614). Because the focus of cursor 660 is on Jane's avatar 612, Jane's avatar 612 becomes more attentive and/or more active, and optionally becomes larger. The animated expression of Jane's avatar 612 also changes to one of excitement. Jane's avatar 612 stops looking at or following cursor 660 when the focus of cursor 660 is on Jane's avatar 612. Avatars 610 and 614 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • At FIG. 6J, computer system 600 continues to detect a drag input (e.g., swipe gesture 650C or mouse movement) on touch-sensitive surface 600B, which moves cursor 660 from Jane's avatar 612 to John's avatar 610, as shown in FIG. 6K. At FIG. 6K, because the focus of cursor 660 is no longer on Jane's avatar 612, Jane's avatar 612 becomes less attentive, and optionally gets smaller and less animated (e.g., less movement as compared to when the focus was on Jane's avatar 612). Because the focus of cursor 660 is on John's avatar 610, John's avatar 610 becomes more attentive and/or more active (more animated, more movement) (e.g., as compared to avatars 612-614 at FIG. 6K, as compared to John's avatar 610 when the focus was not on John's avatar 610), and optionally becomes larger. The animated expression of John's avatar 610 also changes to one of excitement. John's avatar 610 stops looking at or following cursor 660 when the focus of cursor 660 is on John's avatar 610. Avatars 612 and 614 do not have the focus of cursor 660 and continue to look in the direction of cursor 660 on lock screen 602 based on cursor 660 moving.
  • At FIG. 6K, while the focus of cursor 660 is on John's avatar 610, computer system 600 detects a selection input (e.g., tap gesture 650D on touch-sensitive surface 600B or a mouse click) to select John's avatar 610. In response to detecting the selection input (e.g., tap gesture 650D or a mouse click), the expression of John's avatar changes to reflect the selection and computer system 600 ceases to display (e.g., by fading out and/or by sliding off of the display) avatars 612-616 and options 620A-620C. In response to detecting the selection input selecting John's avatar 610 (and without receiving and/or requiring further users inputs), John's avatar moves (e.g., slides, translates) toward a central location (e.g., a predefined location) of lock screen 602, as illustrated in FIGS. 6L-60 . John's avatar is animated (e.g., using a physics model) during the movement to the central location to reflect the movement, such as by causing a tilting of the head of John's avatar 610 in one direction (e.g., to the right) as the avatar accelerates (e.g., at FIGS. 6M and 6N) and tilting of the head of John's avatar 610 in another direction (e.g., an opposite direction, to the left) as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. Other features of John's avatar 610 also optionally reflect the movement, such as the hair of John's avatar moving.
  • At FIG. 60 , John's avatar 610 is displayed at the central location, along with password entry field 622A and switch user option 620D. Password entry field 622A is configured to receive textual input for receiving a password for John's user account. Switch user option 620D, when selected, causes computer system 600 to re-display avatars 610-616, as in FIG. 6K, such that a new selection can be made and a password for a different account can be entered. In some embodiments, selection of switch user option 620D causes John's avatar to move (e.g., slide, translate) toward the original position on the left side of lock screen 602.
  • FIG. 6P illustrates exemplary animations when different avatars are selected. Left column 670A illustrates a timeline of John's avatar 610 moving in response to being selected, as explained above with respect to FIGS. 6K-60 . As illustrated in left column 670A of FIG. 6P, John's avatar 610 slides to the right to the central location, thereby causing the head of John's avatar 610 to tilt to the right as the avatar accelerates and, optionally, to the left as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. As John's avatar 610 slides to the right, the head of John's avatar 610 shifts slightly (e.g., to the left) relative to the circle around the head of John's avatar 610 (e.g., the head lags the movement of the circle). In some embodiments, the amount by which the avatar shifts relative to the boundary around the avatar and/or the speed with which the avatar shifts relative to the boundary around the avatar is determined based on how far the avatar is from the respective location it will be displayed once it is selected (e.g., when the password entry field is displayed). For example, the avatar shifts further and/or faster relative to the boundary if the avatar is further away from the respective location and shifts less far and/or slower relative to the boundary if the avatar is closer to the respective location.
  • As illustrated in center column 670B of FIG. 6P, had Jane's avatar 612 been selected, Jane's avatar 612 would also move (e.g., slide, translate) to the right to the central location, thereby causing the head of Jane's avatar 612 to tilt to the right as the avatar accelerates and, optionally, to the left as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. Because the starting location of Jane's avatar 612 is closer to the central location as compared to John's avatar 610, Jane's avatar 612 moves more slowly as compared to John's avatar 610 and Jane's avatar 612 includes less head tilt because of the reduced acceleration and deceleration.
  • As illustrated in right column 670C of FIG. 6P, had Sam's avatar 614 been selected, Sam's avatar 614 would move (e.g., slide, translate) to the left to the central location, thereby causing the head of Sam's avatar 614 to tilt to the left as the avatar accelerates and to the right as the avatar decelerates to stop at the central location. Because the starting location of Sam's avatar 614 is closer to the central location as compared to John's avatar 610, Sam's avatar 614 moves more slowly as compared to John's avatar 610 and Sam's avatar 614 includes less head tilt as compared to John's avatar 610 because of the reduced acceleration and deceleration. Based on being selected, John's avatar 610, Jane's avatar 612, and Sam's avatar 614 all move to the same central location (e.g., the predetermined location) to indicate which account has been selected, as shown in the bottom row of FIG. 6P, and the password entry field is displayed.
  • Returning to the example where the user has selected John's avatar 610, at FIG. 6Q, computer system 600 has received user input (e.g., voice input and/or gesture input at touch-sensitive surface 600B) corresponding to a request for a password hint. In response to receiving the user input corresponding to a request for a password hint, computer system 600 displays password hint 622B, which provides the user with one or more hints of the password for John's user account. In response to receiving the user input corresponding to a request for a password hint, computer system 600 animates John's avatar 610 with an animation that is specific to requests for hints, such as an animation of John's avatar 610 with an inquisitive appearance.
  • At FIG. 6Q, computer system 600 receives a selection input (e.g., tap gesture 650E at touch-sensitive surface 600B or a mouse click), corresponding to selection of password entry field 622A. In response to receiving the selection input corresponding to selection of password entry field 622A, password hint 622B ceases to be displayed and John's avatar 610 glances down at password entry field 622A, then animates back to a neutral pose (e.g., not looking down at password entry field 622A). At FIG. 6R, as computer system 600 receives keyboard user input 650F (e.g., via activation of characters of keyboard 600C) that causes entry of characters into password entry field 622A, John's avatar 610 glances down at password entry field 622A (e.g., continues to look down at password entry field 622A).
  • Subsequent to receiving keyboard user input 650F and in accordance with a determination that no characters have been entered into password entry field 622A for a third predetermined amount of time (e.g., 0.25 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds), John's avatar 610 ceases to glance down at password entry field 622A and returns to a neutral pose, as shown in FIG. 6S. At FIG. 6T, computer system 600 has continued to not receive user inputs for a fourth predetermined amount of time (e.g., same as the first predetermined amount of time; 5 seconds, 7 seconds, or 10 seconds) and, in response, animates John's avatar 610 while waiting for user input. The animation of John's avatar 610 while waiting for user inputs includes, for example, John's avatar 610 looking around, bobbing his head, and/or smiling. In some embodiments, the waiting animation includes cycle through repetitive animations with unique animations randomly interspersed within the repetitive animations. In some embodiments, the animation of John's avatar 610 waiting at FIG. 6T (while John's avatar 610 has not been selected) is different from the animation of John's avatar 610 waiting at FIG. 6E (while John's avatar 610 has been selected) because computer system 600 is in a different state (selection state of John's avatar 610). Different animations of waiting based on the state of computer system 600 provides the user with feedback about the state of computer system 600.
  • At FIG. 6T, computer system 600 receives submission input 650G (e.g., via activation of a return key on keyboard 600C). In response to receiving submission input 650G and in accordance with a determination that the password in password entry field 622A does not correspond to (e.g., does not match) the password for John's user account, John's avatar 610 animates to indicate that the password is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 6U, such as by the head of John's avatar 610 shaking side-to-side in disagreement and/or John's avatar 610 animating to a failure pose of a frown. Based on the password being incorrect, password entry field 622A also moves side-to-side (e.g., multiple times), as shown in FIG. 6U, and computer system 600 does not unlock. In response to receiving submission input 650G and in accordance with a determination that the password in password entry field 622A does correspond to (e.g., matches) the password for John's user account, John's avatar animates to a success pose to indicate that the password is correct, as shown in FIG. 6V, then computer system 600 unlocks to display homepage 680 for John's user account, as shown in FIG. 6W. The success pose includes a smile and John's avatar 610 ceasing to animate (becomes static, maintaining the smile) as John's account logs in.
  • In some embodiments, rather than keyboard input into password entry field 622A for submission, computer system 600 receives fingerprint information 650H via fingerprint sensor 600D, as shown in FIG. 6T. In accordance with the detected fingerprint information 650H matching enrolled fingerprint information for John's user account (e.g., regardless of the characters entered into the password entry field), John's avatar 610 animates to the success pose to indicate that the received fingerprint information matches, as shown in FIG. 6V, then computer system 600 unlocks to display homepage 680 for John's user account, as shown in FIG. 6W. In accordance with the detected fingerprint information 650H not matching enrolled fingerprint information for John's user account, John's avatar animates to indicate that the received fingerprint information does not match, as shown in FIG. 6U, such as by the head of John's avatar 610 shaking side-to-side in disagreement and/or John's avatar 610 animating to a failure pose of a frown. Based on the detected fingerprint information 650H not matching enrolled fingerprint information for John's user account, password entry field 622A also moves side-to-side, as shown in FIG. 6U, and computer system 600 does not unlock.
  • With computer system 600 unlocked, the user can access additional applications and functions of computer system 600, which were not accessible with computer system 600 locked. At FIG. 6W, homepage 680 includes a plurality of icons 680A that, when selected, display a corresponding application. For example, because computer system 600 is logged into John's user account, selecting the mail icon starts the mail application that displays John's email messages. At FIG. 6X, while John's user account is logged into computer system 600, a messaging application 682 is displayed concurrently with John's contact information 684 (e.g., a part of an address book). Messaging application 682 uses the static pose of John's avatar 610 to represent John in a conversation with another user, where the other user is represented by avatar 618. The static pose of John's avatar 610 in messaging application 682 is the same as the static pose of John's avatar 610 at FIG. 6A, which John previously selected. Similarly, John's contact information 684 uses the same static pose of John's avatar 610 to represent John. In some embodiments, John's avatar 610 is animated in messaging application 682 (e.g., to be directed at and/or follow a cursor).
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing an avatar on a lock screen using a computer system in accordance with some embodiments. Method 700 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600) (e.g., a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a smartphone, a tablet, and/or a smartwatch) that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices (e.g., a keyboard, a touch-sensitive surface, a computer mouse). Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.
  • As described below, method 700 provides an intuitive way for managing an avatar on a lock screen. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for using a lock screen, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to use a lock screen faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.
  • In some embodiments, the computer system is in a locked state or an unlocked state. In the locked state, the computer system is powered on and operational but is prevented from performing a predefined set of operations in response to user input. The predefined set of operations optionally includes navigation between user interfaces, activation or deactivation of a predefined set of functions, and/or activation or deactivation of certain applications. The locked state can be used to prevent unintentional or unauthorized use of some functionality of the computer system and/or activation or deactivation of some functions of the computer system. In the unlocked state, the computer system is powered on and operational and is not prevented from performing at least a portion of the predefined set of operations that cannot be performed while in the locked state.
  • When the computer system is in the locked state, the computer system is said to be locked. When the computer system is in the unlocked state, the computer system is said to be unlocked. In some embodiments, the computer system in the locked state optionally responds to a limited set of user inputs, including input that corresponds to an attempt to transition the computer system to the unlocked state or input that corresponds to powering the computer system off.
  • While the computer system (e.g., 600) is in a locked state (702), the computer system (e.g., 600) displays (704), via the display generation component, a lock screen user interface (e.g., 602) that includes a first avatar (e.g., 610, 612, or 614) (e.g., a first avatar character and/or representing a first user account of the computer system) (and, optionally, concurrently with a second avatar different from the first avatar).
  • While the computer system (e.g., 600) is in the locked state (702) and while displaying the lock screen user interface that includes the first avatar (e.g., 610, 612, or 614), the computer system (e.g., 600) receives (706), via the one or more input devices, first input (e.g., user input, input via a mouse or trackpad/touch-sensitive surface that moves a cursor on the lock screen user interface, (virtual or mechanical) keyboard input that enters a character into a password/passcode field of the lock screen user interface, and/or input (such as selection of a login button, activation of an enter button of a keyboard) that corresponds to a request to unlock the computer system).
  • In response (708) to receiving the first input (and, optionally, while the computer system remains in the locked state), the computer system (e.g., 600) displays (e.g., 710) (e.g., newly displaying and/or updating display of), via the display generation component, a respective change in a respective element (e.g., 660, 620A, 622A, or 622B) of the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602) other than the first avatar (e.g., movement of a cursor and/or entry of characters into a password/passcode field) including: in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input (e.g., 650A, 650B, (parts of or all of) 650C, 650D, 650E, 650F, 650G, or 650H), the respective change is a first change (712) in the respective element (e.g., 660, 620A, 622A, 622B) of the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602), and in accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input (e.g., 650A, 650B, (parts of or all of) 650C, 650D, 650E, 650F, 650G, or 650H) different from the first type of input, the respective change is a second change (714) in the respective element (e.g., 660, 620A, 622A, or 622B) of the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602) that is different from the first change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface (e.g., the first type of input is a click and the second type of input is cursor movement; and/or the first and second types of input are both cursor movement, but in different directions). In some embodiments, the first input is received while the respective element of the lock screen user interface is displayed, and the respective element changes (e.g., a location of the respective element changes, a visual characteristic of the respective element changes) in response to and based on the first input. In some embodiments, the degree of change in a visual characteristic of the respective element is based on a degree, duration, quantity, and/or direction of the first input. For example, a swipe input (e.g., on a touch-sensitive surface) and/or mouse input (e.g., using a computer mouse) that travels a short distance causes less movement of a cursor than a swipe input (e.g., on the touch-sensitive surface) and/or mouse input (e.g., using the computer mouse) that travels a longer distance. For another example, entry of multiple characters via a keyboard causes more changes to a password/passcode field as compared to entry of a single character via the keyboard.
  • In response (708) to receiving the first input (and, optionally, while the computer system remains in the locked state), the computer system (e.g., 600) displays (716) (e.g., concurrently with display of the lock screen user interface object), via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar (e.g., 610, 612, or 614 in FIGS. 6C-6D and 6F-6H) (and, optionally, the second avatar (e.g., 610, 612, or 614 in FIGS. 6C-6D and FIGS. 6F-6H)) transitioning through a plurality of poses, wherein, after the animation, the first avatar (e.g., 610, 612, or 614 in FIG. 6D or FIG. 6H) (and, optionally, the second avatar) is concurrently displayed along with the respective change in the respective element of the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602) other than the first avatar. In some embodiments, a pose optionally includes a static pose or animated pose, such as an animated pose where the avatar character appears to be looking at a location on a display corresponding to the received first input. In some embodiments, the animated pose includes an amount of movement, such as changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character. In some embodiments, the animated pose includes changes in facial expression of the first avatar. In some embodiments, the animation of the first avatar is performed in response to receiving the first input. Changing a respective element of a lock screen user interface based on an input provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first avatar (e.g., 610) (and, optionally, the second avatar (e.g., 612 and/or 614)) is a three-dimensional avatar and the animation, over time, of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) transitioning through the plurality of poses includes a change in shape of the first avatar and/or a rotation of the first avatar. In some embodiments, the rotation of the first avatar includes rotation other than rotation in a plane of the display on which the first avatar is being displayed. In some embodiments, the rotation of the first avatar includes the head of the avatar turning left to look left, the head turning right to look right, the head turning up to look up, and/or the head turning down to look down. In some embodiments, the first avatar (e.g., the head of the first avatar) appears to rotate (e.g., concurrently) along two axis.
  • Changing a shape and/or rotation of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback that the system is active and that inputs will be processed. Further, inputs that affect the animation of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first input is a first type of input (e.g., 650A or 650B) (e.g., an input that causes a cursor to pass over the first avatar and/or a successful login attempt), the animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through the plurality of poses includes a first animation (and, optionally, a first pose) without including a second animation (and, optionally, without including a second pose). In accordance with a determination that the first input is a second type of input (e.g., 650C or 650D) (e.g., an input that does not cause the cursor to pass over the first avatar and/or an unsuccessful login attempt) that is different from the first type of input, the animation, over time, of the first avatar (e.g., 610) transitioning through the plurality of poses includes the second animation (and, optionally, the second pose) without including the first animation (and, optionally, without including the first pose).
  • Accordingly, the animations of the first avatar are based on the user input and different user inputs cause different animations of the first avatar. In some embodiments, the animation includes smooth transitions among multiple poses and/or the animation includes animated movement of the first avatar to transition among the multiple poses. In some embodiments, the second avatar transitions (concurrently with the first avatar) through a plurality of poses (e.g., different from the first avatar). Animating the first avatar differently based on the received input provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the respective element includes (e.g., is) a cursor (e.g., 660) displayed via the display generation component. The first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a first pointing device input (e.g., 654A, 650B, or 650C) received via a pointing device (e.g., 600B) (e.g., movement of a (e.g., wired or wireless) computer mouse; and/or movement of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface such as a trackpad, a touch screen, a touch bar, or a touch-sensitive mouse) that causes the cursor (e.g., 660) to move in the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602) (e.g., without occluding the first avatar). The second type of input is an input (e.g., 650D, 650F, 650G, or 650H) other than input that causes the cursor to move (e.g., a click input, a selection input, a typing input). A cursor moving about the display provides the user with feedback about the location of the pointing device with respect to the element of the user interface. In some embodiments, the first avatar looking in the direction of the cursor provides the user with visual feedback about where on the display the user can find the cursor, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first change (or, alternatively, the second change) in the respective element of the lock screen user interface is an animated change in location (e.g., that does not pass over (e.g., occlude) the first avatar) of the cursor (e.g., while maintaining other visual appearances (e.g., size, color, and/or shape) of the cursor). In some embodiments, the plurality of poses includes: a first pose where the first avatar is looking in a direction of the cursor while the cursor is at a first display location; and a second pose, different from the first pose, where the first avatar is looking in a direction (e.g., different direction) of the cursor while the cursor is at a second display location. In some embodiments, the first avatar looks at the cursor (e.g., based on eye movement and/or head movement of the avatar) while the location of the cursor changes. In some embodiments, the first avatar ceases to look at the cursor based on the cursor not moving for a predetermined period of time.
  • In some embodiments, the respective element includes (e.g., is) a cursor (e.g., 660) displayed via the display generation component. The first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a second pointing device input (e.g., last portion of input 650C) received via a pointing device (e.g., 600B) (e.g., movement of a (e.g., wired or wireless) computer mouse; and/or movement of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface) that causes the cursor (e.g., 660) to move across the lock screen user interface to a location of the first avatar (e.g., 610) (or otherwise point at the first avatar and/or highlight the first avatar). The second type of input is an input other than input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface to a location of the first avatar (e.g., a click input, a selection input, and/or a typing input). The first avatar having different amounts of movement based on whether the in the direction of the cursor provides the user with visual feedback about where the cursor is located on the display, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first change (or, alternatively, the second change) in the respective element of the lock screen user interface is an animated change in location (e.g., that does not pass over (e.g., occlude) the first avatar) of the cursor (e.g., while maintaining other visual appearances (e.g., size, color, and/or shape) of the cursor). In some embodiments, the plurality of poses includes: a third pose (that is optionally different from the first and/or second pose) where the first avatar includes a first amount of movement (e.g., a non-zero amount of movement such as changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character) while the cursor is at a display location that does not occlude the first avatar, and a fourth pose, different from the third (and, optionally, different from the first and/or second) pose, where the first avatar includes a second amount of movement (e.g., a non-zero amount of movement such as changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character), different from the first amount of movement (e.g., more than or less than the first amount of movement), while the cursor is at a display location that does occlude the first avatar.
  • In some embodiments, the respective element includes (e.g., is) a cursor (e.g., 660) displayed via the display generation component. The first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a third pointing device input (e.g., 650D), received via a pointing device (e.g., 600B) (e.g., depression (or other activation) of a button of a computer mouse; and/or contact on a touch-sensitive surface that exceeds a non-zero intensity threshold), corresponding to a press input (e.g., a press of a button or a pressure sensitive surface). The first change (or, alternatively, the second change) in the respective element of the lock screen user interface includes (e.g., is) a change in an appearance (e.g., size, color, and/or shape) of a selectable user interface object (e.g., 620A-620C) in the lock screen user interface object (e.g., a button, text entry field, image, or other selectable user interface object). The second type of input is an input other than input corresponding to press input (e.g., input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface). The appearance of the cursor changing when the computer system detects a mouse click provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the system and that the input has been received, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first type of input (or, alternatively, the second type of input) is a selection input (e.g., 650D) corresponding to selection of the first avatar (e.g., received via a pointing device, such as a mouse click input when the cursor is pointing on (e.g., occluding the first avatar)) and the second type of input is an input other than a selection input corresponding to selection of the first avatar (e.g., typing input and/or input that causes the cursor to move across the lock screen user interface). Animating the first avatar when the computer system detects selection of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that the first avatar has been selected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, in response to receiving the first input (e.g., 650D), displaying, via the display generation component, the first avatar (e.g., 610) sliding in a direction (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 6L-60 ) (e.g., towards a center of the lock screen user interface; translating; and/or moving in or along a direction from a first display location to a second display location). Wherein displaying (e.g., concurrently with display of the respective element), via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar transitioning through the plurality of poses includes a first pose (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6M) based on the direction of sliding. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is sliding in a first direction (e.g., to the right) (and/or in accordance with a determination that the starting position of the first avatar is on the left side of the display when the first input is received), the animation includes a first sliding pose (e.g., head tilted to the left) (without including a second sliding pose) and in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is sliding in a second direction (e.g., to the left) different from the first direction (and/or in accordance with a determination that the starting position of the first avatar is on the right side of the display when the first input is received), the animation includes a second sliding pose (e.g., head tilted to the right) without including the first sliding pose. In some embodiments, the plurality of poses includes the head of the first avatar tilting (e.g., tilting away and/or in a first direction) in concurrence with the first avatar sliding (e.g., the first avatar tilts in an opposite direction of the sliding). In some embodiments, the plurality of poses includes the head of the first avatar ceasing to tilt in the first direction and/or tilting in a different direction (e.g., the opposite direction and/or a second direction) in concurrence with the speed of sliding of the first avatar slowing down and/or stopping. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the first input, the computer system ceases to display (e.g., prior to sliding the first avatar) other avatars (e.g., that were displayed when the first input was received) corresponding to other accounts. Animating the first avatar to slide (e.g., towards a center of the lock screen user interface) when the computer system detects selection of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that the first avatar has been selected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, in response to receiving the first input, the computer system (e.g., 600) displays, an animation of the first avatar moving, including (e.g., as shown in FIG. 6P): in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is displayed in a first portion of the lock screen user interface (e.g., on a first side of the lock screen user interface), the animation of the first avatar moving includes movement of the first avatar in a first direction (e.g., the first avatar being dragged from the first side of the lock screen user interface to a predefined location such as a center of the lock screen user interface), and in accordance with a determination that the first avatar is displayed in a second portion of the lock screen user interface that is different from the first portion of the lock screen user interface (e.g., on a second side of the lock screen user interface), the animation of the first avatar moving includes movement of the first avatar in a second direction that is different from the first direction (e.g., the first avatar being dragged from the second side of the lock screen user interface to the predefined location). Moving the first avatar in a direction that is based on the starting location of the first avatar provides the user with visual feedback about which avatar has been selected (e.g., by moving the avatar to the predefined location), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first avatar faces a third direction and/or the head of the first avatar tilts in the third direction based on the movement of the first avatar being in the first direction. In some embodiments, the first avatar faces a fourth direction and/or the head of the first avatar tilts in the fourth direction based on the movement of the first avatar being in the second direction. In some embodiments, the speed at which the first avatar moves in the first/second direction (e.g., to the predefined location) is based on a starting location and/or distance of movement of the first avatar (e.g., longer distance to move to the predefined location results in faster speed). In some embodiments, the first avatar moves at a faster speed and/or reaches a higher speed of movement when the first avatar starts further from the predefined location as compared to when the first avatar starts closer to the predefined location.
  • In some embodiments, (e.g., while the computer system is in the locked state) in response to a determination that user input has not been received (at the computer system) for a first predetermined period of time, the computer system (e.g., 600) displays, via the display generation component, an inactivity animation (e.g., as shown in FIG. 6F) of the first avatar (e.g., 610) (and, optionally, a second avatar (e.g., 612 or 614)) (e.g., an animation indicating inactivity for the first predetermined period of time has elapsed, an animation of the first (and/or second) avatar sleeping (e.g., eyes closed), and/or an animation of the first (and/or second) avatar being bored). In some embodiments, in response to a determination that user input has not been received for a predetermined period of time that is longer than the first predetermined period of time, changing (e.g., subsequent to displaying the inactivity animation of the first avatar) a display state of the display generation component (e.g., dimming the display and/or turning off the display). Animating the first avatar to indicate that no activity has been detected for the first predetermined period of time provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that no inputs have been received. The animation of the first avatar that no activity has been detected for the first predetermined period of time also provides the user with a warning that the computer system will take further action (e.g., dim or turn off display) if no activity continues to be detected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first type of input includes (e.g., is) entering characters (e.g., 600F) in a password entry field (e.g., 622A) (e.g., consisting of numeric, alphabetical, and/or non-alphanumeric characters). Changing a respective element of a lock screen user interface based on an input entering characters in the password entry field provides the user with visual feedback that the input has been received and about the effect of the input on the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the computer system receives a request (e.g., 600C, 650G, and/or 650H) to unlock the computer system (e.g., 600) including providing authentication information (e.g., a password/passcode, or biometric authentication). In response to receiving the request to unlock the computer system, the computer system (e.g., 600) displays, via the display generation component, animation, over time, of the first avatar (e.g., 610) transitioning through a plurality of poses includes: in accordance with a determination that the request to unlock the computer system corresponds to (e.g., results in) a successful login attempt (e.g., correct password is submitted), changing the appearance of the first avatar to a first appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6V), and in accordance with a determination that the request to unlock the computer system corresponds to (e.g., results in) an unsuccessful login attempt (e.g., incorrect password is submitted), changing the appearance of the first avatar to a second appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6U) that is different from the first appearance. Accordingly, the first avatar reacts differently when a correct password is submitted as compared to when an incorrect password is submitted. In some embodiments, when the login attempt is not successful, the password entry field shakes (e.g., left-to-right and right-to-left) to indicate that the password is wrong (e.g., the respective change is a shake in the password entry field). Changing a respective element of a lock screen user interface based on whether a request to unlock the computer system is successful provides the user with visual feedback about the input that has been received and about whether the computer system will remain locked or be unlocked, which provides improved visual feedback. Providing different animations of the first avatar based on whether the request to unlock the computer system is successful similarly provides the user with visual feedback about the input that has been received and about whether the computer system will remain locked or be unlocked, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6V) is a static pose (e.g., the first avatar smiling without additional head movement) and the second appearance (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6U) is an animated appearance (e.g., the first avatar includes an animated reaction and/or the animation includes head movement). Displaying a static pose when the password is successful as compared to an animated appearance when the password is not successful provides the user with visual feedback about the password that has been received and about whether the computer system will remain locked or be unlocked, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the second type of input (or, alternatively, another type of input) includes (e.g., is) a request for a password hint (e.g., selection of an option requesting that the electronic device provide (e.g., display) a hint as to what the password is) (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6Q). Providing a different animation of the first avatar when a request is received for a hint of what the password is (as compared to another input, such as input to submit password) provides the user with visual feedback about the input that has been received and about what information computer system will provide (e.g., the hint), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, while displaying the first avatar, detecting entry of characters (e.g., 650F) (e.g., characters of a (e.g., correct or incorrect) password) in a text entry field (e.g., 622A). In some embodiments, the entry of the characters (e.g., password) includes keyboard input. In response to detecting the entry of characters in the text entry field (e.g., 622A), the computer system (e.g., 600) displays, via the display generation component, the first avatar (e.g., 610) paying attention to (e.g., glancing at or in the direction of) a text entry field (such as a password entry field) into which the characters are being entered (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6R). Providing a different animation of the first avatar when text is being entered into the text entry field provides the user with visual feedback about the input that is being received. The first avatar paying attention to the text entry field provides the user with feedback about the location at which the received input is being entered into the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, subsequent to displaying the first avatar (e.g., 610) glancing at (e.g., in the direction of) the text entry field (e.g., 622A) (e.g., a password entry field) into which the characters are being entered, the computer system (e.g., 600) detects that characters have not been entered into the text entry field for at least a predetermined amount of time. In response to detecting that characters have not been entered into the text entry field (e.g., 622A) for at least the predetermined amount of time, the computer system (e.g., 600) displays (e.g., after detecting that text entry into the password entry field has ended and/or after determining that text has not been entered into the password entry field for a predefined amount of time), via the display generation component, an animation of the first avatar transitioning to a pose (e.g., 610 as in FIGS. 6S and/or 6T) (e.g., a neutral pose and/or the same pose that the first avatar had before entry of characters of the password begin) that does not include the first avatar paying attention to (e.g., glancing at or in the direction of) the text entry field. Returning to not paying attention to at the text entry field (and/or returning to a neutral pose) once the computer system stops receiving input at the text entry field provides the user with visual feedback about whether text is being received and entered into the text entry field, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, while the computer system (e.g., 600) is in the locked state, in accordance with a determination that user input has not been received for a second predetermined period of time (e.g., that is different from or less than the first predetermined period of time), displaying, via the display generation component, an animation of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input (e.g., an animation of the first avatar and/or second avatar looking around, bobbing, and/or smiling) (e.g., 610, 612, and/or 614 in FIG. 6E; or 610 in FIG. 6T). Providing animations of the first avatar when user input is not received provides the user with visual feedback that input the user may be trying to enter has not been received and/or that the computer system is waiting on the user to provide input to change the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the animation of the first avatar (e.g., 610) indicating that the computer system (e.g., 600) is waiting for user input is based on a state of the computer system, including: in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a first state, the animation of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input is a first waiting animation (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6E), and in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a second state, the animation of the first avatar (and, optionally, the second avatar) indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input is a second waiting animation (e.g., 610 in FIG. 6T) that is different from the first waiting animation. In some embodiments, the first state is a state in which a plurality of avatars are displayed for selection and the second state is a state in which an avatar (such as the first avatar) of the plurality of avatars has been selected (and, optionally, a password entry field is displayed). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the computer system is in a third state (e.g., a state in which the computer system is in a sleep state and/or low power state), the animation of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input is a third waiting animation (different from the first and second waiting animations). In some embodiments, while displaying the animation of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input, user input is received. In response to receiving the user input, the computer system ceases to display the animation of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input. Providing different animations of the first avatar based on the state of the computer system when user input is not received provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and what type of information should be entered into the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, while the computer system (e.g., 600) is waiting for user input, displaying, via the display generation component, a waiting animation (e.g., 610, 612, and/or 614 in FIG. 6E; or 610 in FIG. 6T) that includes displaying, in sequence: a repeating animation that includes multiple repetitions of the same behavior (e.g., repeatedly (e.g., twice, thrice, or four times) and/or with other animations interspersed before/between/after the multiple first waiting animations); a first emphasis animation that is different from the repeating animation and is selected (e.g., randomly or pseudo-randomly) from a set of emphasis animations that includes three or more different emphasis animations, wherein in some embodiments, the set of emphasis animations includes a large number of emphasis animations (e.g., more than 20, more than 50, or more than 100 emphasis animations) so that the behavior of the avatar does not appear to repeat itself for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, or 2 hours); the repeating animation; a second emphasis animation that is different from the repeating animation and is selected from the set of emphasis animations; and the repeating animation. In some embodiments, some of the animations of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input are used three, four, five, or more times as often as particular other animations of the first avatar indicating that the computer system is waiting for user input. Providing animations of the first avatar to indicate that the computer system is waiting for user input provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and that information should be entered into the computer system to proceed, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, an animation of the first avatar (e.g., 610) indicating that the computer system (e.g., 600) is waiting for user input includes a first amount of movement (e.g., rotating, facial expressions, nodding, changing in size, changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character) of the first avatar when the computer system is in a state in which the first avatar has been selected from among a plurality of avatars (e.g., as in FIG. 6T) (e.g., the plurality of avatars was displayed prior to user selection of the first avatar and the first avatar is displayed without concurrently displaying other avatars of the plurality of avatars) and an animation of the first avatar (e.g., 610) indicating that the computer system (e.g., 600) is waiting for user input includes a second amount of movement (e.g., rotating, facial expressions, nodding, changing in size, changes in pitch, roll, and/or tilt of the avatar character), greater than the first amount of movement, of the first avatar when the computer system is in a state in which the first avatar has not been selected from among the plurality of avatars (e.g., as in FIG. 6E) (e.g., the plurality of avatars are concurrently displayed, including the first avatar). In some embodiments, the first avatar is more attentive, reacts more frequently, and/or is more active when the first avatar has been selected (e.g., from among the plurality of avatars) as compared to when the first avatar has not been selected (e.g., no avatar has been selected from among the plurality of avatars). Providing animations with greater movement of the first avatar when the avatar has been selected and less movement of the first avatar when the avatar has not been selected provides the user with visual feedback about the state of the computer system and whether the avatar and corresponding user account has been selected, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, while the computer system is in the locked state, the computer system (e.g., 600) displays, via the display generation component and concurrently with the first avatar (e.g., 610), a password entry field (e.g., 622A) (e.g., text entry field into which characters of a password/passcode can to be entered in response to a text entry input while the text entry field is selected). Concurrently displaying the password entry field with the first avatar enables the computer system to provide the user with feedback about the password entry field (such as whether text is being entered into the password entry field) through various animations of the first avatar, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the lock screen user interface is a password entry user interface (e.g., 602 at FIG. 60 ). While displaying the first avatar (e.g., 610) (e.g., along with one or more other avatars), the computer system (e.g., 600) detects, via one or more user input devices (e.g., a pointing device, a hardware keyboard, and/or a virtual keyboard), selection (e.g., 650D) of the first avatar (e.g., detecting a mouse click while the cursor is on the first avatar). The password entry user interface (e.g., 602 at FIG. 60 ) that includes the password entry field (e.g., 622A) is displayed (e.g., concurrently with display of the first avatar) in response to detecting the selection of (e.g., click on) the first avatar. In some embodiments, the password entry user interface includes a password entry field, a submit button for submitting the entered password, a password hint button for receiving a password hint, and/or a password reset button for resetting the password. Displaying the password entry user interface when the first avatar is selected (e.g., clicked on) provides the user with feedback that a password should be entered to proceed (e.g., to proceed to unlock the computer system), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, while the computer system (e.g., 600) is in the locked state, the computer system (e.g., 600) concurrently displays in the lock screen user interface (e.g., 602 at FIGS. 6A-6K), via the display generation component, a plurality of avatars (e.g., 610, 612, and 614) including the first avatar (e.g., 610) and a second avatar (e.g., 612 or 614) (e.g., a second avatar character and/or representing a second user account of the computer system different from the first user account) that is different from the first avatar. In some embodiments, the computer system displays a plurality of avatars other than the first avatar, wherein each avatar of the plurality of avatars corresponds to a different user account of the computer system. Displaying one or more additional avatars enables the computer system to provide the user with a mechanism to access different user accounts to log into (e.g., by clicking on the avatar and entering the correct password), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first avatar (e.g., 610) and the second avatar (e.g., 612 or 614) are concurrently animated (e.g., the computer system animates both avatars to look at a (same) location of the cursor, the computer system animates both avatars based on the state of the computer system, the computer system animates both avatars independent of each other). In some embodiments, the lock screen user interface includes a plurality of avatars, including the first avatar and the second avatar, wherein each avatar corresponds to a different user account. In some embodiments, the second avatar is also animated and the animations are, optionally, based on the input (or lack of input) that is received. Concurrently displaying the first avatar with other avatars provides the user with additional indications of the user input being received and the state of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, concurrently displaying the plurality of avatars includes animating an avatar (e.g., 610) that has a current input focus (e.g., an avatar that has been selected or is the subject of user input such as a cursor hover or user gaze direction) with an active animation style (e.g., an animation style that includes more dramatic and/or faster movements than a non-active animation style and/or an animation style that responds to a larger number of different user inputs or responds more prominently to user inputs than a non-active animation style) that is not used for avatars that do not have the current input focus, including: in accordance with a determination that the first avatar (e.g., 610) has current input focus (e.g., as in FIG. 6K), the computer system (e.g., 600) concurrently displays the first avatar with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the second avatar with the active animation style); and in accordance with a determination that the second avatar (e.g., 612) has current input focus (e.g., as in FIG. 6J), the computer system (e.g., 600) concurrently displays the second avatar (e.g., 612) with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the first avatar with the active animation style). In some embodiments, the active animation style is applied to one avatar at a time and the non-active animation style is applied to multiple other avatars that do not have the current input focus. In some embodiments, if the computer system detects that input focus has switched to a respective avatar, the respective avatar is displayed with the active animation style while other avatars are displayed with the non-active animation style. Presenting an avatar that is highlighted (e.g., via a mouse over) with a different animation style as compared to avatars that are not highlighted provides the user with visual feedback about which avatar is highlighted/in focus and on which actions will be performed, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, concurrently displaying the plurality of avatars includes animating the plurality of avatars with a non-active animation style. While displaying the plurality of avatars with the non-active animation style, the computer system (e.g., 600) detects that an input focus has been directed to a respective avatar of the plurality of avatars (e.g., an avatar that has been selected or is subject of user input such as a cursor hover or user gaze direction) (e.g., as in FIGS. 6I-6K). In response to detecting the input focus has been directed to the respective avatar, changing the respective avatar from the non-active animation style to an active animation style (e.g., an animation style that includes more dramatic and/or faster movements than a non-active animation style and/or an animation style that responds to a larger number of different user inputs or responds more prominently to user inputs than a non-active animation style), including: in accordance with a determination that the first avatar has current input focus, concurrently displaying the first avatar with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the second avatar with the active animation style and/or without displaying the second avatar); and in accordance with a determination that the second avatar has current input focus, concurrently displaying the second avatar with the active animation style (e.g., without animating the first avatar with the active animation style and/or without displaying the first avatar). Presenting an avatar that is being focused on (e.g., selected) with a different animation style as compared to avatars that are not highlighted provides the user with visual feedback about which avatar is highlighted/in focus and on which actions will be performed, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, animating the first avatar and animating the second avatar includes selecting animations for the first avatar and the second avatar so as to avoid concurrently displaying the same or similar animations for the first avatar and the second avatar. In some embodiments, a plurality of avatars (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, or more avatars) are concurrently displayed and some (or all) concurrently perform various animations and the computer system selects animations for the avatars (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, or more avatars) so as to avoid concurrently displaying the same or similar animation for two avatars. In some embodiments, the computer system selects, for display, the animation of the first avatar transitioning through the plurality of poses based on the second avatar (and, optionally, other (e.g., all) avatars of the plurality of displayed avatars) not being concurrently animated using the animation. In some embodiments, the computer system proactively avoids playing the same animation for multiple different avatars. In some embodiments, animations are selected such that multiple avatars do not play the same animation at the same time. In some embodiments, animations are selects such that the same animation was not recently played (e.g., within a predetermined period of time, within a predetermined number of played animations) for the first avatar being animated and/or for other displayed avatars. Proactively avoiding playing the same animation for multiple different avatars (e.g., via randomness and/or checks for current/recent animations of other avatars) provides the user with feedback that the avatars are not linked together (e.g., correspond to different user accounts), which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, the first avatar (e.g., displayed as part of the lock screen user interface) is static while an operating system of the computer system is loading (e.g., not animated for a non-zero duration of time and/or not animated for the entire duration of the operating system loading) (and, optionally, while the computer system is in the locked state). Displaying a static avatar, rather than an animated avatar, while an operating system of the computer system is loading reduces the need for processing power for the avatar, enabling the operating system to load more quickly, and to provide the user with visual feedback that the operating system is loading, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, in response to a determination that the operating system has finished loading, transitioning (e.g., center the first avatar and/or performing a crossfade animation) display, via the display generation component, of the first avatar from being static to being animated. Transitioning an avatar from being a static avatar to an animated avatar provides the user with feedback that the operating system has finished loading, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • In some embodiments, while the first avatar is static (e.g., 610 at FIG. 6A), a pose of the first avatar (e.g., 610) corresponds to (e.g., is the same as) a user-selected pose associated with user contact information (e.g., as shown in 684) for the user account corresponding to the first avatar. In some embodiments, the pose of the first avatar (while static) is the same as the pose that the user of the user account selected to represent the user in a contact (e.g., in an electronic address book). In some embodiments, the pose of the first avatar is selected based on the user having previously selected that pose for the first avatar to represent the user (e.g., in a contact listing of an electronic address book). Displaying the static avatar using a previously user-selected pose associated with user contact information for the user account provides the user with feedback about which account the avatar corresponds to, which provides improved visual feedback.
  • The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
  • Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as being included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.
  • As described above, one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to improve the lock screen experience. The present disclosure contemplates that in some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. Such personal information data can include demographic data, location-based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records relating to a user's health or level of fitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information, and/or exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.
  • The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users. For example, the personal information data can be used to present relevant avatars. Further, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure. For instance, health and fitness data may be used to provide insights into a user's general wellness, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellness goals.
  • The present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure. Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices. In addition, policies and practices should be adapted for the particular types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US, collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country.
  • Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in the case of lock screen services, the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or anytime thereafter. In another example, users can select not to provide personal information when accessing a lock screen. In addition to providing “opt in” and “opt out” options, the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user may be notified upon downloading an app that their personal information data will be accessed and then reminded again just before personal information data is accessed by the app.
  • Moreover, it is the intent of the present disclosure that personal information data should be managed and handled in a way to minimize risks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once it is no longer needed. In addition, and when applicable, including in certain health related applications, data de-identification can be used to protect a user's privacy. De-identification may be facilitated, when appropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g., collecting location data a city level rather than at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods.
  • Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data.

Claims (13)

1. (canceled)
2. A computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising:
one or more processors; and
memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
displaying, via the display generation component, a plurality of user representations, including a first user representation in a first frame and a second user representation in a second frame;
detecting, via the one or more input devices, movement corresponding to a user of the computer system; and
in response to detecting the movement corresponding to the user of the computer system:
moving the first user representation relative to the first frame; and
moving the second user representation relative to the second frame.
3. The computer system of claim 2, wherein the first user representation is a representation of a first user and the second user representation is a representation of a second user that is different from the first user.
4. The computer system of claim 2, wherein the first user representation is a three-dimensional user representation and the second user representation is a three-dimensional user representation.
5. The computer system of claim 2, wherein the first user representation includes a first portion, and wherein moving the first user representation relative to the first frame includes:
in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the first user representation has a position within the first frame while the first user representation is moving, displaying the first user representation moving and including the first portion of the first user representation; and
in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the first user representation has a position outside the first frame while the first user representation is moving, displaying the first user representation moving and without including the first portion of the first user representation.
6. The computer system of claim 2, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
while a user input has not been detected for at least a threshold amount of time, displaying, via the one or more input devices, movement of the first user representation and/or the second user representation.
7. The computer system of claim 2, wherein the plurality of user representations are arranged in a row.
8. The computer system of claim 2, wherein one or more of the plurality of user representations include respective facial expressions that change over time.
9. The computer system of claim 8, wherein a respective facial expression of a respective user representation changes over time independent of movement corresponding to the user of the computer system.
10. The computer system of claim 2, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
detecting a user input; and
in response to detecting the user input, displaying the first user representation and the first frame moving from a first displayed location to a second displayed location that is different from the first displayed location.
11. The computer system of claim 2, the one or more programs further including instructions for:
displaying, via the display generation component, animated movement of the first frame and the first user representation over time.
12. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for:
displaying, via the display generation component, a plurality of user representations, including a first user representation in a first frame and a second user representation in a second frame;
detecting, via the one or more input devices, movement corresponding to a user of the computer system; and
in response to detecting the movement corresponding to the user of the computer system:
moving the first user representation relative to the first frame; and
moving the second user representation relative to the second frame.
13. A method, comprising:
at a computer system that is in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices:
displaying, via the display generation component, a plurality of user representations, including a first user representation in a first frame and a second user representation in a second frame;
detecting, via the one or more input devices, movement corresponding to a user of the computer system; and
in response to detecting the movement corresponding to the user of the computer system:
moving the first user representation relative to the first frame; and
moving the second user representation relative to the second frame.
US18/375,309 2021-06-04 2023-09-29 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen Pending US20240029334A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/375,309 US20240029334A1 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-09-29 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202163197209P 2021-06-04 2021-06-04
US17/736,925 US11776190B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2022-05-04 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen
US18/375,309 US20240029334A1 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-09-29 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/736,925 Continuation US11776190B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2022-05-04 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20240029334A1 true US20240029334A1 (en) 2024-01-25

Family

ID=84284282

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/736,925 Active US11776190B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2022-05-04 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen
US18/375,309 Pending US20240029334A1 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-09-29 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/736,925 Active US11776190B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2022-05-04 Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (2) US11776190B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI439960B (en) 2010-04-07 2014-06-01 Apple Inc Avatar editing environment
DK180212B1 (en) 2018-05-07 2020-08-19 Apple Inc USER INTERFACE FOR CREATING AVATAR
US11722764B2 (en) 2018-05-07 2023-08-08 Apple Inc. Creative camera
US11921998B2 (en) 2020-05-11 2024-03-05 Apple Inc. Editing features of an avatar
DK181103B1 (en) 2020-05-11 2022-12-15 Apple Inc User interfaces related to time

Family Cites Families (371)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5331170A (en) 1976-09-03 1978-03-24 Seiko Epson Corp Electronic watch
JPS56621A (en) 1979-06-15 1981-01-07 Citizen Watch Co Ltd Digital watch with universal time
JPS5650138A (en) 1979-09-27 1981-05-07 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Manufacture of optical fiber
US4847819A (en) 1988-04-07 1989-07-11 Hong Kuo Hui Universal clock having means for indicating zonal time in other global time zones
DE3832514C1 (en) 1988-09-24 1989-11-02 Iwc International Watch Co. Ag, Schaffhausen, Ch
CH684619B5 (en) 1992-07-17 1995-05-15 Longines Montres Comp D Timepiece universal time display.
JP3007616U (en) 1994-08-08 1995-02-21 翼システム株式会社 Clock with display panel color change mechanism
JPH099072A (en) 1995-06-26 1997-01-10 Aibitsukusu Kk Information communication system
CH687494B5 (en) 1995-07-18 1997-06-30 Utc Service Ag Clock with two ads for two different local times.
US6621524B1 (en) 1997-01-10 2003-09-16 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Image pickup apparatus and method for processing images obtained by means of same
US5982710A (en) 1997-03-14 1999-11-09 Rawat; Prem P. Method and apparatus for providing time using cartesian coordinates
JPH11109066A (en) 1997-09-30 1999-04-23 Bandai Co Ltd Display device
US6084598A (en) 1998-04-23 2000-07-04 Chekerylla; James Apparatus for modifying graphic images
JP2000076460A (en) 1998-06-18 2000-03-14 Minolta Co Ltd Monitor display device
JP2000162349A (en) 1998-11-30 2000-06-16 Casio Comput Co Ltd Image display control device and method
US6434527B1 (en) 1999-05-17 2002-08-13 Microsoft Corporation Signalling and controlling the status of an automatic speech recognition system for use in handsfree conversational dialogue
JP3379101B2 (en) 1999-11-18 2003-02-17 日本電気株式会社 Mobile phone character display system and method
US6968449B1 (en) * 1999-12-15 2005-11-22 Microsoft Corporation Methods and arrangements for providing a mark-up language based graphical user interface for user identification to an operating system
KR20010056965A (en) 1999-12-17 2001-07-04 박희완 Method for creating human characters by partial image synthesis
JP4431918B2 (en) 2000-05-01 2010-03-17 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and recording medium
CA2356232A1 (en) 2000-09-14 2002-03-14 George A. Hansen Dynamically resizable display elements
US8234218B2 (en) 2000-10-10 2012-07-31 AddnClick, Inc Method of inserting/overlaying markers, data packets and objects relative to viewable content and enabling live social networking, N-dimensional virtual environments and/or other value derivable from the content
KR100377936B1 (en) 2000-12-16 2003-03-29 삼성전자주식회사 Method for inputting emotion icon in mobile telecommunication terminal
JP2001273064A (en) 2001-01-24 2001-10-05 Casio Comput Co Ltd Device for controlling image display and method therefor
JP2002251238A (en) 2001-02-22 2002-09-06 Ddl:Kk Method for displaying picture on desk top
GB2373886A (en) 2001-03-28 2002-10-02 Hewlett Packard Co User selectable power management of software applications
JP2003009404A (en) 2001-06-25 2003-01-10 Sharp Corp Residual power notice method and residual power notice device
JP2003242176A (en) 2001-12-13 2003-08-29 Sony Corp Information processing device and method, recording medium and program
JP2003219217A (en) 2002-01-22 2003-07-31 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Imaging apparatus, image pick up method and program
JP2003233616A (en) 2002-02-13 2003-08-22 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Provided information presentation device and information providing device
NL1020299C2 (en) 2002-04-04 2003-10-13 Albert Van Selst Clock and watch fitted with such a clock.
JP2004028918A (en) 2002-06-27 2004-01-29 Aplix Corp Wrist watch
US7227976B1 (en) 2002-07-08 2007-06-05 Videomining Corporation Method and system for real-time facial image enhancement
US6839542B2 (en) 2002-07-22 2005-01-04 Motorola, Inc. Virtual dynamic cellular infrastructure based on coordinate information
US7180524B1 (en) 2002-09-30 2007-02-20 Dale Axelrod Artists' color display system
US20040075699A1 (en) 2002-10-04 2004-04-22 Creo Inc. Method and apparatus for highlighting graphical objects
JP2004184396A (en) 2002-10-09 2004-07-02 Seiko Epson Corp Display device, clock, method for controlling display device, control program, and recording medium
KR100471594B1 (en) 2002-11-26 2005-03-10 엔에이치엔(주) Method for Providing Data Communication Service in Computer Network by using User-Defined Emoticon Image and Computer-Readable Storage Medium for storing Application Program therefor
EP1429291A1 (en) 2002-12-12 2004-06-16 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB System and method for implementing avatars in a mobile environment
CA2517909A1 (en) 2003-03-03 2004-09-16 America Online, Inc. Using avatars to communicate
US20070113181A1 (en) 2003-03-03 2007-05-17 Blattner Patrick D Using avatars to communicate real-time information
US7908554B1 (en) 2003-03-03 2011-03-15 Aol Inc. Modifying avatar behavior based on user action or mood
US20040225966A1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-11-11 Motorola, Inc. Method and device for automatically displaying appointments
TWI254202B (en) 2003-12-05 2006-05-01 Mediatek Inc Portable electronic apparatus and power management method thereof
US7707520B2 (en) 2004-01-30 2010-04-27 Yahoo! Inc. Method and apparatus for providing flash-based avatars
CN1961333A (en) 2004-02-12 2007-05-09 贝斯简·阿利万迪 System and method for producing merchandise from a virtual environment
IL160429A0 (en) 2004-02-16 2005-11-20 Home Comfort Technologies Ltd Environmental control system
US20050190653A1 (en) 2004-02-27 2005-09-01 Chen Chih Y. Method of displaying world time with automatic correction of daylight saving time in a movement
US7697960B2 (en) 2004-04-23 2010-04-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for displaying status information on a mobile terminal
US7555717B2 (en) 2004-04-30 2009-06-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for displaying screen image on mobile terminal
US20060020904A1 (en) 2004-07-09 2006-01-26 Antti Aaltonen Stripe user interface
JP4449723B2 (en) 2004-12-08 2010-04-14 ソニー株式会社 Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program
KR100663277B1 (en) 2004-12-20 2007-01-02 삼성전자주식회사 Device and?method for processing system-related event in wireless terminal
KR100511210B1 (en) 2004-12-27 2005-08-30 주식회사지앤지커머스 Method for converting 2d image into pseudo 3d image and user-adapted total coordination method in use artificial intelligence, and service besiness method thereof
US8488023B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2013-07-16 DigitalOptics Corporation Europe Limited Identifying facial expressions in acquired digital images
US7751285B1 (en) 2005-03-28 2010-07-06 Nano Time, LLC Customizable and wearable device with electronic images
KR100740189B1 (en) 2005-05-13 2007-07-16 노키아 코포레이션 Device with a graphical user interface
US20060294465A1 (en) 2005-06-22 2006-12-28 Comverse, Inc. Method and system for creating and distributing mobile avatars
CA2553473A1 (en) 2005-07-26 2007-01-26 Wa James Tam Generating a depth map from a tw0-dimensional source image for stereoscopic and multiview imaging
US7760269B2 (en) 2005-08-22 2010-07-20 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and apparatus for sizing an image on a display
US7834877B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2010-11-16 Freedom Scientific, Inc. System-wide content-sensitive text stylization and replacement
JP2009527860A (en) 2006-02-24 2009-07-30 ヴィサン インダストリーズ System and method for dynamically designing products with digital content
US8280979B2 (en) * 2006-02-27 2012-10-02 Microsoft Corporation Persistent public machine setting
US8620038B2 (en) 2006-05-05 2013-12-31 Parham Aarabi Method, system and computer program product for automatic and semi-automatic modification of digital images of faces
US8601379B2 (en) 2006-05-07 2013-12-03 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. Methods for interactive communications with real time effects and avatar environment interaction
US20080052242A1 (en) 2006-08-23 2008-02-28 Gofigure! Llc Systems and methods for exchanging graphics between communication devices
US7536645B2 (en) 2006-10-23 2009-05-19 Research In Motion, Ltd System and method for customizing layer based themes
US8971667B2 (en) 2006-10-23 2015-03-03 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Digital image auto-resizing
KR100912877B1 (en) 2006-12-02 2009-08-18 한국전자통신연구원 A mobile communication terminal having a function of the creating 3d avata model and the method thereof
GB0703276D0 (en) 2007-02-20 2007-03-28 Skype Ltd Instant messaging activity notification
US8253770B2 (en) 2007-05-31 2012-08-28 Eastman Kodak Company Residential video communication system
KR20090002176A (en) 2007-06-20 2009-01-09 엔에이치엔(주) System for providing ranking of game-avatar in network and method thereof
GB2450757A (en) 2007-07-06 2009-01-07 Sony Comp Entertainment Europe Avatar customisation, transmission and reception
US8726194B2 (en) 2007-07-27 2014-05-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Item selection using enhanced control
US8146005B2 (en) 2007-08-07 2012-03-27 International Business Machines Corporation Creating a customized avatar that reflects a user's distinguishable attributes
US8390628B2 (en) 2007-09-11 2013-03-05 Sony Computer Entertainment America Llc Facial animation using motion capture data
JP4466702B2 (en) 2007-09-12 2010-05-26 カシオ計算機株式会社 Imaging apparatus and imaging control program
KR100929236B1 (en) 2007-09-18 2009-12-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Portable terminal with touch screen and operation control method thereof
US8892999B2 (en) 2007-11-30 2014-11-18 Nike, Inc. Interactive avatar for social network services
US20090202114A1 (en) 2008-02-13 2009-08-13 Sebastien Morin Live-Action Image Capture
US8156060B2 (en) 2008-02-27 2012-04-10 Inteliwise Sp Z.O.O. Systems and methods for generating and implementing an interactive man-machine web interface based on natural language processing and avatar virtual agent based character
US20090254862A1 (en) 2008-03-03 2009-10-08 Kidzui, Inc Method and apparatus for user interface for child oriented computer network
US9513704B2 (en) 2008-03-12 2016-12-06 Immersion Corporation Haptically enabled user interface
US20100211899A1 (en) 2009-02-17 2010-08-19 Robb Fujioka Virtual Marketplace Accessible To Widgetized Avatars
US8169438B1 (en) 2008-03-31 2012-05-01 Pixar Temporally coherent hair deformation
US8832552B2 (en) 2008-04-03 2014-09-09 Nokia Corporation Automated selection of avatar characteristics for groups
US20090251484A1 (en) 2008-04-03 2009-10-08 Motorola, Inc. Avatar for a portable device
KR101687689B1 (en) 2008-04-30 2016-12-19 가부시키가이샤 아크로디아 Character display data generation device and method
US8401284B2 (en) 2008-05-28 2013-03-19 Apple Inc. Color correcting method and apparatus
EP2293855A1 (en) 2008-06-02 2011-03-16 Nike International Ltd. System and method for creating an avatar
AU2008358849A1 (en) 2008-06-30 2010-01-07 Accenture Global Services Limited Gaming system
US8446414B2 (en) 2008-07-14 2013-05-21 Microsoft Corporation Programming APIS for an extensible avatar system
US8941642B2 (en) 2008-10-17 2015-01-27 Kabushiki Kaisha Square Enix System for the creation and editing of three dimensional models
DE102008054113A1 (en) 2008-10-31 2010-05-06 Deutsche Telekom Ag Method for adapting the background image on a screen
KR101450580B1 (en) 2008-11-19 2014-10-14 삼성전자주식회사 Method and Apparatus for composing images
JP5256001B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2013-08-07 京セラドキュメントソリューションズ株式会社 Color adjustment apparatus, method and program
US20100149573A1 (en) 2008-12-17 2010-06-17 Xerox Corporation System and method of providing image forming machine power up status information
US20100153847A1 (en) 2008-12-17 2010-06-17 Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. User deformation of movie character images
JP2010176170A (en) 2009-01-27 2010-08-12 Sony Ericsson Mobilecommunications Japan Inc Display apparatus, display control method, and display control program
US8295546B2 (en) 2009-01-30 2012-10-23 Microsoft Corporation Pose tracking pipeline
US8386957B2 (en) 2009-02-25 2013-02-26 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method for dynamically scaling an original background layout
KR20100111563A (en) 2009-04-07 2010-10-15 삼성전자주식회사 Method for composing display in mobile terminal
US20100277470A1 (en) 2009-05-01 2010-11-04 Microsoft Corporation Systems And Methods For Applying Model Tracking To Motion Capture
US9377857B2 (en) 2009-05-01 2016-06-28 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Show body position
KR101598335B1 (en) 2009-06-11 2016-02-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Operating a Mobile Termianl
US8446398B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2013-05-21 Intel Corporation Power conservation for mobile device displays
CN101692681A (en) 2009-09-17 2010-04-07 杭州聚贝软件科技有限公司 Method and system for realizing virtual image interactive interface on phone set terminal
EP3855297A3 (en) 2009-09-22 2021-10-27 Apple Inc. Device method and graphical user interface for manipulating user interface objects
US20110074807A1 (en) 2009-09-30 2011-03-31 Hitachi, Ltd. Method of color customization of content screen
CA2780765A1 (en) 2009-11-13 2011-05-19 Google Inc. Live wallpaper
US20110221755A1 (en) 2010-03-12 2011-09-15 Kevin Geisner Bionic motion
US20110239115A1 (en) * 2010-03-26 2011-09-29 Motorola, Inc. Selecting an avatar on a display screen of a mobile device
JP2011209887A (en) 2010-03-29 2011-10-20 Sannetto:Kk Method and program for creating avatar, and network service system
FR2958487A1 (en) 2010-04-06 2011-10-07 Alcatel Lucent A METHOD OF REAL TIME DISTORTION OF A REAL ENTITY RECORDED IN A VIDEO SEQUENCE
US8451994B2 (en) 2010-04-07 2013-05-28 Apple Inc. Switching cameras during a video conference of a multi-camera mobile device
US9542038B2 (en) 2010-04-07 2017-01-10 Apple Inc. Personalizing colors of user interfaces
TWI439960B (en) 2010-04-07 2014-06-01 Apple Inc Avatar editing environment
KR101642725B1 (en) 2010-04-14 2016-08-11 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for managing lock function in mobile terminal
US8694899B2 (en) 2010-06-01 2014-04-08 Apple Inc. Avatars reflecting user states
US9245177B2 (en) 2010-06-02 2016-01-26 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Limiting avatar gesture display
US8749557B2 (en) 2010-06-11 2014-06-10 Microsoft Corporation Interacting with user interface via avatar
KR20120013727A (en) 2010-08-06 2012-02-15 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and control method thereof
JP5230705B2 (en) 2010-09-10 2013-07-10 株式会社沖データ Image processing device
US20120069028A1 (en) 2010-09-20 2012-03-22 Yahoo! Inc. Real-time animations of emoticons using facial recognition during a video chat
US8558844B2 (en) 2010-09-28 2013-10-15 Apple Inc. Systems, methods, and computer-readable media for changing colors of displayed assets
US8830226B2 (en) 2010-09-28 2014-09-09 Apple Inc. Systems, methods, and computer-readable media for integrating a three-dimensional asset with a three-dimensional model
US9122053B2 (en) 2010-10-15 2015-09-01 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Realistic occlusion for a head mounted augmented reality display
US20120113762A1 (en) 2010-10-23 2012-05-10 Frost Productions LLC Electronic timepiece apparatus with random number and phrase generating functionality
CN102075727A (en) 2010-12-30 2011-05-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for processing images in videophone
CN102142149A (en) 2011-01-26 2011-08-03 深圳市同洲电子股份有限公司 Method and device for obtaining contact image
US8635549B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2014-01-21 Microsoft Corporation Directly assigning desktop backgrounds
GB201102794D0 (en) 2011-02-17 2011-03-30 Metail Ltd Online retail system
US8896652B2 (en) 2011-02-28 2014-11-25 Soryn Technologies Llc System and method for real-time video communications
US8643680B2 (en) 2011-04-08 2014-02-04 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Gaze-based content display
CN102750070A (en) 2011-04-22 2012-10-24 上海三旗通信科技股份有限公司 Mobile data-related functional interesting interactive wallpaper interactive mode
US8665345B2 (en) 2011-05-18 2014-03-04 Intellectual Ventures Fund 83 Llc Video summary including a feature of interest
KR20120132134A (en) 2011-05-27 2012-12-05 윤일 Clock display 24 hours a multinational
US9013489B2 (en) 2011-06-06 2015-04-21 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Generation of avatar reflecting player appearance
JP5915000B2 (en) 2011-06-13 2016-05-11 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus and program
JP5765070B2 (en) 2011-06-13 2015-08-19 ソニー株式会社 Display switching device, display switching method, display switching program
US8832284B1 (en) 2011-06-16 2014-09-09 Google Inc. Virtual socializing
US9153031B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2015-10-06 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Modifying video regions using mobile device input
US9411506B1 (en) 2011-06-28 2016-08-09 Google Inc. Providing additional functionality for a group messaging application
KR101832959B1 (en) 2011-08-10 2018-02-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile device and control method for the same
CN102298797A (en) 2011-08-31 2011-12-28 深圳市美丽同盟科技有限公司 Three-dimensional virtual fitting method, device and system
CN102271241A (en) 2011-09-02 2011-12-07 北京邮电大学 Image communication method and system based on facial expression/action recognition
US9448708B1 (en) 2011-10-19 2016-09-20 Google Inc. Theming for virtual collaboration
JP2013092989A (en) 2011-10-27 2013-05-16 Kyocera Corp Device, method, and program
JP2013097760A (en) 2011-11-07 2013-05-20 Toshiba Corp Authentication system, terminal device, authentication program, and authentication method
JP2013101528A (en) 2011-11-09 2013-05-23 Sony Corp Information processing apparatus, display control method, and program
CN105653031B (en) 2011-11-23 2019-10-01 英特尔公司 Posture input with multiple views, display and physics
EP2600316A1 (en) 2011-11-29 2013-06-05 Inria Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique Method, system and software program for shooting and editing a film comprising at least one image of a 3D computer-generated animation
US8767034B2 (en) 2011-12-01 2014-07-01 Tangome, Inc. Augmenting a video conference
US8941707B2 (en) 2011-12-01 2015-01-27 Tangome, Inc. Video messaging
US20130147933A1 (en) 2011-12-09 2013-06-13 Charles J. Kulas User image insertion into a text message
US20130159900A1 (en) 2011-12-20 2013-06-20 Nokia Corporation Method, apparatus and computer program product for graphically enhancing the user interface of a device
US9207837B2 (en) 2011-12-20 2015-12-08 Nokia Technologies Oy Method, apparatus and computer program product for providing multiple levels of interaction with a program
US9398262B2 (en) 2011-12-29 2016-07-19 Intel Corporation Communication using avatar
KR101907136B1 (en) 2012-01-27 2018-10-11 라인 가부시키가이샤 System and method for avatar service through cable and wireless web
US9204099B2 (en) 2012-02-01 2015-12-01 Magor Communications Corporation Videoconferencing system providing virtual physical context
US8723796B2 (en) 2012-02-02 2014-05-13 Kodak Alaris Inc. Multi-user interactive display system
WO2013120851A1 (en) 2012-02-13 2013-08-22 Mach-3D Sàrl Method for sharing emotions through the creation of three-dimensional avatars and their interaction through a cloud-based platform
US9747495B2 (en) 2012-03-06 2017-08-29 Adobe Systems Incorporated Systems and methods for creating and distributing modifiable animated video messages
KR102030754B1 (en) 2012-03-08 2019-10-10 삼성전자주식회사 Image edting apparatus and method for selecting region of interest
US9264660B1 (en) 2012-03-30 2016-02-16 Google Inc. Presenter control during a video conference
CN104205171A (en) 2012-04-09 2014-12-10 英特尔公司 System and method for avatar generation, rendering and animation
CN104170358B (en) 2012-04-09 2016-05-11 英特尔公司 For the system and method for incarnation management and selection
WO2013152453A1 (en) 2012-04-09 2013-10-17 Intel Corporation Communication using interactive avatars
CN102622085A (en) 2012-04-11 2012-08-01 北京航空航天大学 Multidimensional sense man-machine interaction system and method
US20130286161A1 (en) 2012-04-25 2013-10-31 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Three-dimensional face recognition for mobile devices
US9785883B2 (en) 2012-04-27 2017-10-10 Excalibur Ip, Llc Avatars for use with personalized generalized content recommendations
US20130293686A1 (en) 2012-05-03 2013-11-07 Qualcomm Incorporated 3d reconstruction of human subject using a mobile device
KR101823288B1 (en) 2012-05-09 2018-01-29 애플 인크. Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between display states in response to gesture
US10990270B2 (en) 2012-05-09 2021-04-27 Apple Inc. Context-specific user interfaces
US9459781B2 (en) 2012-05-09 2016-10-04 Apple Inc. Context-specific user interfaces for displaying animated sequences
KR101868352B1 (en) 2012-05-14 2018-06-19 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and control method thereof
US9361021B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2016-06-07 Irobot Corporation Graphical user interfaces including touchpad driving interfaces for telemedicine devices
US20130322218A1 (en) 2012-05-29 2013-12-05 Wolfgang Burkhardt World Time Timepiece
CN104395929B (en) 2012-06-21 2017-10-03 微软技术许可有限责任公司 Constructed using the incarnation of depth camera
EP2680615B1 (en) 2012-06-25 2018-08-08 LG Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and audio zooming method thereof
CN102819400A (en) 2012-08-14 2012-12-12 北京小米科技有限责任公司 Desktop system, interface interaction method and interface interaction device of mobile terminal
US9936165B2 (en) 2012-09-06 2018-04-03 Intel Corporation System and method for avatar creation and synchronization
US9602559B1 (en) 2012-09-07 2017-03-21 Mindmeld, Inc. Collaborative communication system with real-time anticipatory computing
US20140078144A1 (en) 2012-09-14 2014-03-20 Squee, Inc. Systems and methods for avatar creation
US20140098296A1 (en) 2012-10-04 2014-04-10 Ati Technologies Ulc Method and apparatus for changing a perspective of a video
KR102004287B1 (en) 2012-10-17 2019-07-26 에스케이플래닛 주식회사 Apparatus and methods of making user emoticon
US8832606B2 (en) * 2012-10-19 2014-09-09 Google Inc. Wallpaper assignment for multi-user mobile device
KR101390228B1 (en) 2012-10-22 2014-05-07 (주)카카오 Device and method of displaying image on chat area, and server for managing chat data
US9063564B2 (en) 2012-10-30 2015-06-23 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for action indication selection
WO2014078598A1 (en) 2012-11-14 2014-05-22 invi Labs, Inc. System for and method of embedding rich media into text messages
US9696898B2 (en) 2012-11-14 2017-07-04 Facebook, Inc. Scrolling through a series of content items
WO2014094199A1 (en) 2012-12-17 2014-06-26 Intel Corporation Facial movement based avatar animation
CN104903835B (en) 2012-12-29 2018-05-04 苹果公司 For abandoning equipment, method and the graphic user interface of generation tactile output for more contact gestures
CN103927190A (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-16 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Network expression downloading method and device
CN103093490B (en) 2013-02-02 2015-08-26 浙江大学 Based on the real-time face animation method of single video camera
US10708545B2 (en) 2018-01-17 2020-07-07 Duelight Llc System, method, and computer program for transmitting face models based on face data points
US9094576B1 (en) 2013-03-12 2015-07-28 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Rendered audiovisual communication
US9654761B1 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-05-16 Google Inc. Computer vision algorithm for capturing and refocusing imagery
JP5603452B1 (en) 2013-04-11 2014-10-08 株式会社スクウェア・エニックス Video game processing apparatus and video game processing program
IL226047A (en) 2013-04-29 2017-12-31 Hershkovitz Reshef May Method and system for providing personal emoticons
EP2992692B1 (en) 2013-05-04 2018-08-29 DECHARMS, Christopher Mobile security technology
US9721166B2 (en) 2013-05-05 2017-08-01 Qognify Ltd. System and method for identifying a particular human in images using an artificial image composite or avatar
GB2515266B (en) 2013-05-09 2018-02-28 Disney Entpr Inc Manufacturing Process for 3D Printed Objects
KR20140133363A (en) 2013-05-10 2014-11-19 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and Method for controlling the display apparatus thereof
CN104184760B (en) 2013-05-22 2018-08-07 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Information interacting method, client in communication process and server
CN105190700A (en) 2013-06-04 2015-12-23 英特尔公司 Avatar-based video encoding
US9378576B2 (en) 2013-06-07 2016-06-28 Faceshift Ag Online modeling for real-time facial animation
US10168882B2 (en) 2013-06-09 2019-01-01 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for switching between camera interfaces
KR20150008996A (en) 2013-07-04 2015-01-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and control method thereof
US20150033192A1 (en) 2013-07-23 2015-01-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for creating effective interactive advertising content
JP2013232230A (en) 2013-07-25 2013-11-14 Sharp Corp Display device, television receiver, display method, program, and recording medium
JP6132260B2 (en) 2013-07-30 2017-05-24 ブラザー工業株式会社 Print data editing program
US10289265B2 (en) 2013-08-15 2019-05-14 Excalibur Ip, Llc Capture and retrieval of a personalized mood icon
US9881645B2 (en) 2013-08-20 2018-01-30 Google Llc Systems, methods, and media for editing video during playback via gestures
US9804760B2 (en) 2013-08-22 2017-10-31 Apple Inc. Scrollable in-line camera for capturing and sharing content
KR102143895B1 (en) 2013-09-03 2020-08-12 애플 인크. User interface for manipulating user interface objects
US10001817B2 (en) 2013-09-03 2018-06-19 Apple Inc. User interface for manipulating user interface objects with magnetic properties
KR102077108B1 (en) 2013-09-13 2020-02-14 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for providing contents experience service
US9959431B2 (en) 2013-09-16 2018-05-01 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for displaying potentially private information
US10222937B2 (en) 2013-09-19 2019-03-05 Messagepoint Inc. System and method for variant content navigation
US20150302624A1 (en) 2013-10-09 2015-10-22 Genue, Inc. Pattern based design application
US9246961B2 (en) 2013-11-27 2016-01-26 Facebook, Inc. Communication user interface systems and methods
CN105793809A (en) 2013-11-27 2016-07-20 脸谱公司 Communication user interface systems and methods
CN104753762B (en) 2013-12-31 2018-07-27 北京发现角科技有限公司 The method and system that ornament is added into avatar icon applied to instant messaging
WO2015114950A1 (en) 2014-01-30 2015-08-06 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Organ image capturing device
US10691332B2 (en) 2014-02-28 2020-06-23 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. Text input on an interactive display
US9519273B2 (en) 2014-03-06 2016-12-13 Seiko Epson Corporation Electronic timepiece and movement
CN106133796B (en) 2014-03-25 2019-07-16 苹果公司 For indicating the method and system of virtual objects in the view of true environment
US10845982B2 (en) 2014-04-28 2020-11-24 Facebook, Inc. Providing intelligent transcriptions of sound messages in a messaging application
US20150317945A1 (en) 2014-04-30 2015-11-05 Yahoo! Inc. Systems and methods for generating tinted glass effect for interface controls and elements
CN107087431B (en) 2014-05-09 2021-02-05 谷歌有限责任公司 System and method for discriminating eye signals and continuous biometric identification
WO2015175240A1 (en) 2014-05-15 2015-11-19 Narvii Inc. Systems and methods implementing user interface objects
US9628416B2 (en) 2014-05-30 2017-04-18 Cisco Technology, Inc. Photo avatars
US9185062B1 (en) 2014-05-31 2015-11-10 Apple Inc. Message user interfaces for capture and transmittal of media and location content
US9589362B2 (en) 2014-07-01 2017-03-07 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method of three-dimensional model generation
US20160134840A1 (en) 2014-07-28 2016-05-12 Alexa Margaret McCulloch Avatar-Mediated Telepresence Systems with Enhanced Filtering
WO2016017987A1 (en) 2014-07-31 2016-02-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and device for providing image
US9561444B2 (en) 2014-08-01 2017-02-07 Electronic Arts Inc. Resolving graphical conflicts between objects
KR102393950B1 (en) 2014-08-02 2022-05-04 애플 인크. Context-specific user interfaces
US9230355B1 (en) 2014-08-21 2016-01-05 Glu Mobile Inc. Methods and systems for images with interactive filters
KR102418119B1 (en) 2014-08-25 2022-07-07 삼성전자 주식회사 Method for organizing a clock frame and an wearable electronic device implementing the same
KR102258579B1 (en) 2014-08-29 2021-05-31 엘지전자 주식회사 Watch type terminal
KR102367550B1 (en) 2014-09-02 2022-02-28 삼성전자 주식회사 Controlling a camera module based on physiological signals
KR101540544B1 (en) 2014-09-05 2015-07-30 서용창 Message service method using character, user device for performing the method, message application comprising the method
US10212111B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-02-19 Google Llc System and interface that facilitate selecting videos to share in a messaging application
CN104182741A (en) 2014-09-15 2014-12-03 联想(北京)有限公司 Image acquisition prompt method and device and electronic device
WO2016042926A1 (en) 2014-09-19 2016-03-24 日本電気株式会社 Image processing device, image processing method, and program
CN106201161B (en) 2014-09-23 2021-09-03 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Display method and system of electronic equipment
US9633463B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2017-04-25 Intel Corporation User gesture driven avatar apparatus and method
US10361986B2 (en) 2014-09-29 2019-07-23 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Gameplay in a chat thread
US10572103B2 (en) 2014-09-30 2020-02-25 Apple Inc. Timeline view of recently opened documents
WO2016057062A1 (en) 2014-10-10 2016-04-14 Simplify and Go, LLC World watch
KR102240302B1 (en) 2014-10-21 2021-04-14 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and Method for virtual fitting thereof
KR102251483B1 (en) 2014-10-23 2021-05-14 삼성전자주식회사 Electronic device and method for processing image
CN106062862B (en) 2014-10-24 2020-04-21 杭州凌感科技有限公司 System and method for immersive and interactive multimedia generation
CN104376160A (en) 2014-11-07 2015-02-25 薛景 Real person simulation individuality ornament matching system
US9906772B2 (en) 2014-11-24 2018-02-27 Mediatek Inc. Method for performing multi-camera capturing control of an electronic device, and associated apparatus
KR101997500B1 (en) 2014-11-25 2019-07-08 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for generating personalized 3d face model
KR101639894B1 (en) 2014-11-26 2016-07-14 홍익대학교세종캠퍼스산학협력단 Methods customizing avatar on touch screen
MA41117A (en) 2014-12-05 2017-10-10 Myfiziq Ltd IMAGING OF A BODY
US9824502B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2017-11-21 Intel Corporation Sketch selection for rendering 3D model avatar
US9830728B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2017-11-28 Intel Corporation Augmented facial animation
WO2016101132A1 (en) 2014-12-23 2016-06-30 Intel Corporation Facial gesture driven animation of non-facial features
US20160187995A1 (en) 2014-12-30 2016-06-30 Tyco Fire & Security Gmbh Contextual Based Gesture Recognition And Control
JP6152125B2 (en) 2015-01-23 2017-06-21 任天堂株式会社 Program, information processing apparatus, information processing system, and avatar image generation method
GB2534847A (en) 2015-01-28 2016-08-10 Sony Computer Entertainment Europe Ltd Display
JP6525611B2 (en) 2015-01-29 2019-06-05 キヤノン株式会社 Image processing apparatus and control method thereof
JP6525617B2 (en) 2015-02-03 2019-06-05 キヤノン株式会社 Image processing apparatus and control method thereof
WO2016144385A1 (en) 2015-03-08 2016-09-15 Apple Inc. Sharing user-configurable graphical constructs
US9632664B2 (en) 2015-03-08 2017-04-25 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback
US9959623B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2018-05-01 Here Global B.V. Display of an annotation representation
CN107533356A (en) 2015-03-09 2018-01-02 文塔纳3D有限责任公司 Head portrait control system
KR101587115B1 (en) 2015-03-11 2016-01-21 이영규 System for avatar messenger service
US9852543B2 (en) 2015-03-27 2017-12-26 Snap Inc. Automated three dimensional model generation
JP2018514020A (en) 2015-04-07 2018-05-31 インテル コーポレイション Avatar keyboard
US9625987B1 (en) 2015-04-17 2017-04-18 Google Inc. Updating and displaying information in different power modes
KR20160131275A (en) 2015-05-06 2016-11-16 엘지전자 주식회사 Watch type terminal
US20160327915A1 (en) 2015-05-08 2016-11-10 Garmin Switzerland Gmbh Smart watch
CN106303690A (en) 2015-05-27 2017-01-04 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of method for processing video frequency and device
KR20160143429A (en) 2015-06-05 2016-12-14 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
US10572571B2 (en) 2015-06-05 2020-02-25 Apple Inc. API for specifying display of complication on an electronic watch
US10165949B2 (en) 2015-06-14 2019-01-01 Facense Ltd. Estimating posture using head-mounted cameras
US20160370974A1 (en) 2015-06-22 2016-12-22 Here Global B.V. Causation of Expansion of a Supplemental Content Overlay
CN105100462A (en) 2015-07-10 2015-11-25 广州市久邦数码科技有限公司 Short message system having custom theme edition function
US20170018289A1 (en) 2015-07-15 2017-01-19 String Theory, Inc. Emoji as facetracking video masks
CN107924579A (en) 2015-08-14 2018-04-17 麦特尔有限公司 The method for generating personalization 3D head models or 3D body models
US9639945B2 (en) 2015-08-27 2017-05-02 Lytro, Inc. Depth-based application of image effects
WO2017048898A1 (en) 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Mazur Kai Human-computer interface
US9349414B1 (en) 2015-09-18 2016-05-24 Odile Aimee Furment System and method for simultaneous capture of two video streams
US9686497B1 (en) 2015-10-29 2017-06-20 Crater Group Co. Video annotation and dynamic video call display for multi-camera devices
AU2015252123A1 (en) 2015-11-05 2017-05-25 Duffell, Emily MRS Digital Clock
US10025972B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2018-07-17 Facebook, Inc. Systems and methods for dynamically generating emojis based on image analysis of facial features
US20170178287A1 (en) 2015-12-21 2017-06-22 Glen J. Anderson Identity obfuscation
CN105611215A (en) 2015-12-30 2016-05-25 掌赢信息科技(上海)有限公司 Video call method and device
KR20170081391A (en) 2016-01-04 2017-07-12 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
US10664741B2 (en) 2016-01-14 2020-05-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Selecting a behavior of a virtual agent
US10062133B1 (en) 2016-01-26 2018-08-28 Google Llc Image retrieval for computing devices
EP3207823A1 (en) 2016-02-16 2017-08-23 Braun GmbH Interactive system setup concept
GB2548154A (en) 2016-03-11 2017-09-13 Sony Computer Entertainment Europe Ltd Virtual reality
US10025399B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2018-07-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Watch type mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
US20170285916A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-10-05 Yan Xu Camera effects for photo story generation
US10331336B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2019-06-25 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for messaging
DK179831B1 (en) 2016-05-18 2019-07-22 Apple Inc. Devices, methods and graphical user interfaces for messaging
WO2017201326A1 (en) 2016-05-18 2017-11-23 Apple Inc. Applying acknowledgement options in a graphical messaging user interface
US10332111B2 (en) 2016-05-19 2019-06-25 Visa International Service Association Authentication with smartwatch
US10009536B2 (en) 2016-06-12 2018-06-26 Apple Inc. Applying a simulated optical effect based on data received from multiple camera sensors
WO2017223530A1 (en) 2016-06-23 2017-12-28 LoomAi, Inc. Systems and methods for generating computer ready animation models of a human head from captured data images
EP3264251B1 (en) 2016-06-29 2019-09-04 Dassault Systèmes Generation of a color of an object displayed on a gui
US10360708B2 (en) 2016-06-30 2019-07-23 Snap Inc. Avatar based ideogram generation
US10572005B2 (en) 2016-07-29 2020-02-25 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Private communication with gazing
US9955061B2 (en) 2016-08-03 2018-04-24 International Business Machines Corporation Obtaining camera device image data representing an event
WO2018049430A2 (en) 2016-08-11 2018-03-15 Integem Inc. An intelligent interactive and augmented reality based user interface platform
US20180047200A1 (en) 2016-08-11 2018-02-15 Jibjab Media Inc. Combining user images and computer-generated illustrations to produce personalized animated digital avatars
KR20180020386A (en) 2016-08-18 2018-02-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and operating method thereof
US10514822B2 (en) 2016-08-24 2019-12-24 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Systems and methods for text entry for multi-user text-based communication
US10466891B2 (en) 2016-09-12 2019-11-05 Apple Inc. Special lock mode user interface
EP3516627A4 (en) 2016-09-23 2020-06-24 Apple Inc. Avatar creation and editing
US10602133B2 (en) 2016-10-04 2020-03-24 Facebook, Inc. Controls and interfaces for user interactions in virtual spaces
US10432559B2 (en) 2016-10-24 2019-10-01 Snap Inc. Generating and displaying customized avatars in electronic messages
KR102641940B1 (en) 2016-11-03 2024-02-29 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and control method thereof
KR102257909B1 (en) 2016-11-07 2021-05-28 스냅 인코포레이티드 Selective identification and order of image modifiers
JP6266736B1 (en) 2016-12-07 2018-01-24 株式会社コロプラ Method for communicating via virtual space, program for causing computer to execute the method, and information processing apparatus for executing the program
JP6240301B1 (en) 2016-12-26 2017-11-29 株式会社コロプラ Method for communicating via virtual space, program for causing computer to execute the method, and information processing apparatus for executing the program
KR102638911B1 (en) 2017-02-24 2024-02-22 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for controlling a plurality of internet of things devices
US10438393B2 (en) 2017-03-16 2019-10-08 Linden Research, Inc. Virtual reality presentation of body postures of avatars
DK179412B1 (en) 2017-05-12 2018-06-06 Apple Inc Context-Specific User Interfaces
DK180007B1 (en) 2017-05-16 2020-01-16 Apple Inc. RECORDING AND SENDING EMOJI
DK179948B1 (en) 2017-05-16 2019-10-22 Apple Inc. Recording and sending Emoji
CN110036412A (en) 2017-05-16 2019-07-19 苹果公司 Emoticon is recorded and is sent
KR102364429B1 (en) 2017-05-17 2022-02-17 삼성전자주식회사 Method for displaying contents and electronic device thereof
US11144845B2 (en) 2017-06-02 2021-10-12 Stitch Fix, Inc. Using artificial intelligence to design a product
CN108305317B (en) 2017-08-04 2020-03-17 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Image processing method, device and storage medium
WO2019035619A1 (en) 2017-08-14 2019-02-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for displaying content and electronic device thereof
KR102423175B1 (en) 2017-08-18 2022-07-21 삼성전자주식회사 An apparatus for editing images using depth map and a method thereof
KR102338576B1 (en) 2017-08-22 2021-12-14 삼성전자주식회사 Electronic device which stores depth information associating with image in accordance with Property of depth information acquired using image and the controlling method thereof
US10372298B2 (en) 2017-09-29 2019-08-06 Apple Inc. User interface for multi-user communication session
US10657695B2 (en) 2017-10-30 2020-05-19 Snap Inc. Animated chat presence
US20190172458A1 (en) 2017-12-01 2019-06-06 Affectiva, Inc. Speech analysis for cross-language mental state identification
US10374994B1 (en) 2018-02-21 2019-08-06 King.Com Ltd. Messaging system
CN111742351A (en) 2018-02-23 2020-10-02 三星电子株式会社 Electronic device for generating image including 3D avatar reflecting face motion through 3D avatar corresponding to face and method of operating the same
JP6680307B2 (en) 2018-04-11 2020-04-15 カシオ計算機株式会社 Time display device, time display method, and program
WO2019209431A1 (en) 2018-04-23 2019-10-31 Magic Leap, Inc. Avatar facial expression representation in multidimensional space
DK180212B1 (en) 2018-05-07 2020-08-19 Apple Inc USER INTERFACE FOR CREATING AVATAR
CN110457103A (en) 2018-05-07 2019-11-15 苹果公司 Head portrait creates user interface
US10375313B1 (en) 2018-05-07 2019-08-06 Apple Inc. Creative camera
US11722764B2 (en) 2018-05-07 2023-08-08 Apple Inc. Creative camera
US10482583B1 (en) 2018-05-10 2019-11-19 Google Llc Generating and displaying blur in images
JP2020031316A (en) 2018-08-22 2020-02-27 シャープ株式会社 Image forming apparatus, image color changing method, and image color changing program
JP6427711B1 (en) 2018-08-27 2018-11-21 京セラ株式会社 Electronic device, method and program
US10902661B1 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-01-26 Snap Inc. Dynamic composite user identifier
US10505726B1 (en) 2018-12-07 2019-12-10 Nike, Inc. System and method for providing cryptographically secured digital assets
US11288880B2 (en) 2019-01-18 2022-03-29 Snap Inc. Template-based generation of personalized videos
US11107261B2 (en) 2019-01-18 2021-08-31 Apple Inc. Virtual avatar animation based on facial feature movement
US10817981B1 (en) 2019-02-04 2020-10-27 Facebook, Inc. Color sampling selection for displaying content items using machine learning
US10992619B2 (en) 2019-04-30 2021-04-27 Snap Inc. Messaging system with avatar generation
US11131967B2 (en) 2019-05-06 2021-09-28 Apple Inc. Clock faces for an electronic device
DK201970530A1 (en) 2019-05-06 2021-01-28 Apple Inc Avatar integration with multiple applications
US20200380768A1 (en) 2019-06-02 2020-12-03 Apple Inc. Parameterized generation of two-dimensional images from a three-dimensional model
US11074753B2 (en) 2019-06-02 2021-07-27 Apple Inc. Multi-pass object rendering using a three- dimensional geometric constraint
US11189098B2 (en) 2019-06-28 2021-11-30 Snap Inc. 3D object camera customization system
US20200412975A1 (en) 2019-06-28 2020-12-31 Snap Inc. Content capture with audio input feedback
KR102241153B1 (en) 2019-07-01 2021-04-19 주식회사 시어스랩 Method, apparatus, and system generating 3d avartar from 2d image
US11488359B2 (en) 2019-08-28 2022-11-01 Snap Inc. Providing 3D data for messages in a messaging system
US11189104B2 (en) 2019-08-28 2021-11-30 Snap Inc. Generating 3D data in a messaging system
KR102324566B1 (en) 2019-09-09 2021-11-09 애플 인크. Techniques for managing display usage
CN110662083B (en) 2019-09-30 2022-04-22 北京达佳互联信息技术有限公司 Data processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
US11252274B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2022-02-15 Snap Inc. Messaging application sticker extensions
JP2021145209A (en) 2020-03-11 2021-09-24 キヤノン株式会社 Electronic apparatus
US11921998B2 (en) 2020-05-11 2024-03-05 Apple Inc. Editing features of an avatar
DK181103B1 (en) 2020-05-11 2022-12-15 Apple Inc User interfaces related to time
CN111695471B (en) 2020-06-02 2023-06-27 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Avatar generation method, apparatus, device and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20220392132A1 (en) 2022-12-08
US11776190B2 (en) 2023-10-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11567657B2 (en) Special lock mode user interface
US11609681B2 (en) Reduced size configuration interface
US11755273B2 (en) User interfaces for audio media control
US20230136700A1 (en) Displaying a scrollable list of affordances associated with physical activities
US11675476B2 (en) User interfaces for widgets
US20210263702A1 (en) Audio media user interface
US11776190B2 (en) Techniques for managing an avatar on a lock screen
US11921998B2 (en) Editing features of an avatar
US11520416B2 (en) Interacting with an electronic device through physical movement
US11601419B2 (en) User interfaces for accessing an account
US20200341610A1 (en) Presenting user interfaces that update in response to detection of a hovering object
US11829591B2 (en) User interface for managing input techniques
US20210397270A1 (en) Emoji user interfaces
US11703996B2 (en) User input interfaces
US11960615B2 (en) Methods and user interfaces for voice-based user profile management
US20230195237A1 (en) Navigating user interfaces using hand gestures
US20210374744A1 (en) Configuring an account for a second user identity
US11888796B2 (en) User interfaces for messaging conversations
US11800001B2 (en) User interfaces for presenting indications of incoming calls
US20230393865A1 (en) Method of activating and managing dual user interface operating modes
US20230393616A1 (en) Displaying application views
US20230390636A1 (en) Initiating joint gaming applications
US20230389861A1 (en) Systems and methods for sleep tracking
US20240080642A1 (en) Interfaces for device interactions
US20220100347A1 (en) User interfaces for controlling an insertion marker

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION